JP6860228B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member.

Conventionally, a winning opening called a starting winning opening is provided in the game area on the game board, and a random number is acquired based on the winning of the hit ball to this starting winning opening to determine the winning, and based on this winning result. A game machine that provides a player with a predetermined benefit (for example, a so-called winning game) is widely used (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2007-89978

By the way, in the conventional game machine, when a power failure occurs, the player's interest may be lowered.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest due to a power failure.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a game machine equipped with a winning opening that opens and closes with an opening / closing member
An opening / closing member solenoid that converts the opening / closing member from a closed state to an open state,
An opening / closing control means for controlling the solenoid for opening / closing member,
A counting means for counting the number of game balls won in the winning opening, and
A power outage determination means for determining whether or not a power outage has occurred,
Equipped with a storage means that can retain the stored contents even when the power is cut off,
When it is determined by the power failure determining means that a power failure has occurred at the timing when the opening / closing control means tries to convert the opening / closing member into the open state,
The opening / closing control means does not output the data in a state where the data for setting the opening / closing member in the open state is set in the storage means, and does not time the opening time of the opening / closing member. While outputting the data that puts the member in the closed state,
It said counting means, characterized in that it does not perform a pre-Symbol game balls number counting.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the occurrence of a power failure.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the 1st special variation winning apparatus. It is an enlarged explanatory view which shows the detail of a batch display device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special game state. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a figure explaining the model designation command. It is a flowchart explaining the checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining the initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & prize-winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining the game machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining the V abnormal passage monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the residual ball monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the discharge ball monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining the common processing of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the upper prize winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the lower prize opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the probability change operation area switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the residual ball processing timer update processing. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a variation start process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2-byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the time shortening fluctuation number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game information check process. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot operation transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing of the remaining ball of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the lever solenoid control processing. It is a flowchart explaining the effect command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol variation control process. It is a flowchart explaining the normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the Fuden winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process in the middle of a normal drawing. It is a flowchart explaining the normal electric operation transition setting process. It is a figure explaining the operation mode of the ordinary variable winning apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary electric | residual sphere processing. It is a flowchart explaining the end process per ordinary figure. It is a flowchart explaining the segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the abnormal discharge monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the main prize ball signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the start port signal editing process. It is a figure explaining the operation mode at the time of power failure occurrence and power failure recovery. It is a figure explaining the modification 1, and is the flowchart explaining the main process. It is a figure explaining the modification 1, and is the flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a figure explaining the modification 2 and is a flowchart explaining a main process, and is a figure explaining the operation mode at the time of the occurrence of a power failure and the time of recovery from a power failure. It is a figure explaining the modification 3, the flowchart explaining the main process, and the figure explaining the operation mode at the time of power failure occurrence and power failure recovery. It is a figure explaining the modification 4, the flowchart explaining the main process, and the figure explaining the operation mode at the time of power failure occurrence and power failure recovery. It is a figure explaining the modification 5, and is the block diagram which shows a part of the control system of a game machine, and the flowchart which explains the main process.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The game machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

The frame decoration device 18 on the right side when viewed from the front side of the game machine 10 is one of the auxiliary effect devices capable of executing the auxiliary effect which is the effect performed in response to the game effect which is the effect according to the progress of the game. The protrusion 80 is provided. The protruding portion 80 is provided so as to project to the right side surface of the front frame 12, so that the player playing the game with the game machine can see the game and the game playing with the game machine. It is also visible to people other than the person. The protruding portion 80 includes a plurality of light emitting regions 81 arranged along the vertical direction. Each light emitting region 81 can independently control the light emitting mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emitting color, etc.), and the auxiliary effect is executed by the light emitting mode of the plurality of light emitting regions 81.

The game production, which is an production according to the progress of the game, includes, for example, an error notification for notifying that an error has occurred in the game machine, a game production for a special figure variation display game being executed, and a preliminary determination for start memory. There is a look-ahead effect that suggests or notifies the result, an effect button operation effect that instructs the operation of the operation means, and a launch direction instruction notification that indicates the launch direction of the game ball in the game area. The protrusion 80 executes the auxiliary effect by changing the light emitting mode of the plurality of light emitting regions 81 in response to the game effect selected from these game effects according to the current game state.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (storage plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are arranged. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game ball paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. In addition, the effect button 25 has a built-in LED so that the light emission mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emitting color, etc.) on the upper surface can be changed, thereby notifying the operation timing of the effect button 25. , Auxiliary production can be executed. That is, the effect button 25 also forms one of the auxiliary effect devices capable of executing the auxiliary effect corresponding to the game effect.

Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, to the right of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge that is operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the game machine 10 of this embodiment, the player rotates the operation unit 24 to move the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) has a configuration in which three 7-segment displays (variable display areas) in which seven light emitters (segments) are arranged in a figure of eight are arranged side by side. Each light emitting body can independently change the light emitting mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emitting color, etc.), and by controlling the light emitting mode, identification information (special symbol) can be displayed for each 7-segment display. is there. It is also possible to display information by combining a plurality of 7-segment displays. The display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of identification information (special symbols) are variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed in response to the special figure variation display game. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect related to the special figure variation display game by changing the light emitting mode.

Further, above the display device 41 in the center case 40, a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating is provided. The board effect device 44 is a drum-type device that can rotate around an axis along the left-right direction, and is configured so that only a part of the peripheral surface facing the front can be seen by the player. .. Information is displayed on the peripheral surface for each area that can be seen when facing the front, and multiple types of information are displayed along the circumferential direction, and the information displayed on the peripheral surface facing the front. This is to produce a special figure variation display game. Further, below the display device 41 in the center case 40, a decorative special figure start memory display unit 42 for displaying the decorative special figure start memory corresponding to the start memory is provided.

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the first special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 5).
Further, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5).

Further, on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, below the normal drawing start gate 34, there is a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, which gives a start condition of the second special figure variable display game). Starting prize area) is provided.
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. It keeps a closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) that is vertically closed so that the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal fluctuation winning is achieved by operating the normal power solenoid 37c (see FIG. 5) as a driving device so that the upper end side falls toward the front side. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 5). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state.

Further, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal variable winning device 37. Is placed. The game balls that have won in these general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 5).

Further, on the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a first special variable winning device (lower large winning opening) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 38 and a second special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 39 are arranged.

The first special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, and is the result of a special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the lower prize opening is changed from a closed state (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a lower winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by a lower winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 5) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state. By converting the lower prize opening from the closed state to the open state, it is easy for the game balls to flow into the lower prize opening, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). ing. Inside the lower prize opening (winning area), a lower prize opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 5) is arranged as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the lower prize opening. There is.

The second special variable winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, and is the result of a special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the upper prize opening is changed from a closed state (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable winning device 39 includes, for example, an upper winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing door 39c driven by an upper winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 5) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state. By converting the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state, it is easy for the game balls to flow into the upper prize opening, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). ing. Inside the upper prize opening (winning area), the upper prize opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 5) is arranged as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the upper prize opening. There is.

FIG. 3 shows the flow path of the game ball in the first special variable winning device 38. Inside the first special variable winning device 38 (winning area), a lower large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a is provided as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first special variable winning device 38. ing. All the game balls that have entered the first special variable winning device 38 are detected through the lower large winning opening switch 38a and flow into the upper flow path 38j.

The upper flow path 38j is provided with a probabilistic operating region 38h through which the game ball can flow, and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 5) is used to change the inflow probability of the game ball into the probabilistic operating region 38h. An operating lever member 38i is provided. The lever member 38i is a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction, and as shown in FIG. 3, protrudes forward to cover the probabilistic operation region 38h, and is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot flow into the probabilistic operation region 38h and backward. It is possible to convert to an open state in which the game ball can flow into the probabilistic operation area 38h.

The probabilistic operating region 38h is provided with a probabilistic operating region switch 38d capable of detecting the inflow of the game ball, and the gaming ball flowing into the probabilistic operating region 38h is detected by the probabilistic operating region switch 38d and then the lower flow path 38k. Inflow to. Based on the probability variation operation area switch 38d detecting the game ball, the probability state of the special figure variation display game is set to the high probability state after the end of the special game state.

Further, a passage port switch 38g capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided on the downstream side to the left of the probability variation operation region 38h in the upper flow path 38j, and the game ball that did not flow into the probability variation operation region 38h is provided. After being detected by the passage switch 38g, it flows into the lower flow path 38k. The lower flow path 38k is adapted so that the flow path through which the game ball passing through the probability variation operation region 38h flows down and the flow path through which the game ball passing through the passage port switch 38g flows down are merged on the downstream side. A discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided at the downstream end of the lower flow path 38k, and all the game balls flowing into the lower flow path 38k are detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e. After that, it flows into the discharge flow path for discharging the game ball to the outside of the game machine.

In the first special variable winning device 38 configured in this way, the number of game balls detected by the lower grand prize opening switch 38a matches the number of game balls detected by the probability variation operating area switch 38d and the passing port switch 38g. By doing so, it can be confirmed that all the game balls that have flowed into the upper flow path 38j have been discharged. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the probability variation operation area switch 38d and the passage port switch 38g matches the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e, all the game balls that have flowed into the lower flow path 38k It can be confirmed that it has been discharged. Further, when the number of inflowing game balls detected by the lower grand prize opening switch 38a and the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e match, the game balls flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 are released. It can be confirmed that all have been discharged.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 in which the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball into the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the start winning opening 36 and the left general winning opening 35 can be aimed at winning, and the right game area. By launching a game ball (so-called right-handed), a prize is given to the general drawing start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35 on the right side. You can aim at.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are connected. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map variation display game triggered by a prize and displaying various information is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4, the batch display device 50 is a special figure 1 display (first special figure variation display unit) for a first special figure variation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. ) 51 (D1) and the special figure 2 display (second special figure fluctuation display unit) 52 (D2) for the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game composed of the LED lamp. A special figure 1 hold indicator 54 (D11, D12) for notifying the number of stored figures and a special figure 2 hold indicator 55 (D13, D14) for notifying the starting memory number of the second special figure variation display game are provided.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the second special variable winning device 39), and a time saving state (during normal power support, specific game state). The first game state display unit 76 (D9) that notifies whether the player is in the middle), and the second player that is advantageous to the player (the method corresponding to the game state) among the left-handed (normal) and right-handed. 2 A game status display unit 77 (D8) is provided. Further, a third game state display unit (third game state display, probability state display unit) 78 (D17) is provided to display that the jackpot probability state is in the high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. Has been done.
Further, the batch display device 50 includes a normal map display 74 (D10, D18) for the normal map variation display game and a normal map hold display 75 (D15, D16) for notifying the start storage number of the normal map variation display game. ) And are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the first special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), it is provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment in addition to the central segment. The 8th segment is also blinking and driven to indicate that the segment is changing, so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished from each other. In addition, it may be displayed that the game is changing by sequentially displaying a plurality of identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the special figure change display game. Then, when the result of the game is "off", for example, the central segment (in the case of special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition) is turned on as the result mode of the off, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode of the hit is turned on and the game result is displayed.

The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 shows the number of undigested balls (first start memory number = hold number) among the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. As shown in 4 (c), it is displayed by turning off and turning on (blinking) a plurality of LEDs.
The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 determines the number of undigested balls (second start memory number = hold number) among the number of winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37, which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52. As shown in FIG. 4C, the display is performed by turning off and turning on (blinking) a plurality of LEDs.
The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and is selected according to the result during the special game state as shown in FIG. 4 (d). The LED is turned on according to the number of rounds. The round display unit may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

As shown in FIG. 4E, the first game state display unit 76 turns on the LED when the time is shortened, and turns off the LED when the time is not shortened.
As shown in FIG. 4E, the second game state display unit 77 turns off the LED when the left-handed hit is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed hit (during normal hitting). When the right-handed is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed (when right-handed), the LED is turned on.
As shown in FIG. 4E, the third game state display unit 78 turns on the LED when the power is turned on in a high probability state, and turns off the LED when the power is not in the high probability state.

In the normal map variation display game on the normal map display 74, during the variable display of the normal map variation display game, the variation symbol numbers shown in FIG. 4 (g) are alternately changed and the two LEDs are alternately lit. Display that it is changing. Then, when the result is a hit, it lights up in a lighting mode according to the hit type to indicate that it is a hit, and when the result is a hit, the two LEDs are turned off to indicate that it is a miss. ..
The normal figure hold indicator 75 shows the number of undigested balls (the number of normal figure start memory = the number of hold) among the number of balls passing through the normal figure start gate 34, which is the fluctuation start condition of the normal figure display 74, as shown in FIG. As shown in f), it is displayed by turning off and turning on (blinking) a plurality of LEDs.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and uses a CPU operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like to generate. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a voltage of DC32V. A power failure monitoring signal that has a unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. A control signal generation unit 430 or the like that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal or a reset signal is provided.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) serves as a backup storage means capable of holding stored data even in a power cut state (a state in which power supply to the game machine is stopped). Then, when the power is restored, the control can be resumed based on the data held by the backup storage means.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.
The RAM initialization switch 112 may be operated to clear the error even when the power is not turned on, but in this case, only the error is cleared and the RAM 111C is not initialized. ..

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included. In addition, a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game is also stored.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where the display is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. A display mode that does not exist. The reach state also includes, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various types). A random number generation circuit for generating a variable pattern random number for determining (including the execution time of the variable display game in the variable display without reach or reach), a hit random number for determining the hit of the normal figure variable display game, etc. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 is provided. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, and the current game. One of a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the operating state (time saving operating state) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as a state, the number of start storages, and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

Various switches and sensors are connected to the input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111. Then, a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input, and interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b are converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as floating and output an abnormality detection signal.

The proximity I / F 121a and 121b include a gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, a winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, a lower large winning opening switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, and a second special. Upper large winning opening switch 39a in the variable winning device 39, probabilistic operating area switch 38d provided in the probabilistic operating area 38h in the first special variable winning device 38, starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning A start port 2 switch 37a in the device 37, a passage port switch 38g for detecting a game ball that has not flowed into the probability variation operating region 38h in the first special variation winning device 38, and a game discharged from the first special variation winning device 38. The discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting the ball and the panel radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine are connected.

The outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b are supplied to the second input port 123 and the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, the upper winning opening switch 39a, the probabilistic operating area switch 38d, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, and the starting opening. The detection signal of the 2 switch 37a is input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the passage port switch 38g, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected. Is input to the third input port 124.
Further, the third input port 124 is provided with a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10 or a frame radio wave fraud signal (provided on the front frame 12) from the payout control device 200. A signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor detecting the radio wave) and a payout busy signal (a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command) are also input. .. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine so that the detection signal of the vibration sensor switch is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 and the output of the passage port switch 38g among the outputs to the third input port 124 are from the main board 100 to the relay board 70. It is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. ..

As described above, the proximity I / F 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121a and 121b are supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to a voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become like.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 has a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout), and an overflow switch signal (lower) from the payout control device 200. A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the plate 23 (it is full), and a touch switch signal (a signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). ) Is taken in and supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The first input port 122 has a detection signal of a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10, and a main body frame opening detection provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 64 is also input.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent system malfunction, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121a, 121b, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and has a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b that opens the first special variable winning device 38, an upper large winning opening solenoid 39b that opens the second special variable winning device 39, and ordinary A second output port 134 for outputting operation data of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening the variable winning device 37 and the lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member 38i in the first special variable winning device 38 is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line (common line) to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the game machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, amusement park internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the lower prize-winning port solenoid 38b, the upper prize-winning port solenoid 39b, the peripheral current solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f output from the second output port 134, and sends a solenoid drive signal. The first driver (drive circuit) 138a to be generated and output, the second driver 138b to output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, the fourth output. External information signals supplied from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137, which output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current draw-in side of the batch display device 50 output from the port 136, to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d that outputs to the external information terminal plate 71 is provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs selected in sequence with, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower large winning opening switch 38a, and the upper large The winning port switch 39a, the probability variation operating area switch 38d in the first special variable winning device 38, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, and the passing port switch 38g are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is a display that controls the display of the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It includes a device control circuit 312 and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the display device control circuit 312 of the display content, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, and lights the decorative lamp. , Performs processing such as drive control of motors and solenoids, and management of production time. The display device control circuit 312 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332, a front frame 12, and a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (including a center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. A frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) is provided on the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device is provided. You may have it.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the effect button 25, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 is provided to detect the above and input the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, DC12V for driving the display device 41, motor and LED, DC5V for driving the command I / F331, and DC15V for driving the motor, LED and speaker. Has been done. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC-for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, the display device control circuit 312, and the control circuit 332-334 (IORESET) that drives and controls the lamp, motor, etc. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) toward the gaming area 32 from a launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or the game area flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32. It is discharged from 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of winning opening. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 5) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 is provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and the game area 32 When the game ball driven into the inside passes through the inside of the normal drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start storages is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. If it is less than), the number of normal figure start memories is added (+1) and one normal figure start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of stored numbers of the winnings for starting the normal drawing is displayed on the general drawing holding display 75 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory of starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game. Then, the process of starting the normal map variation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time on the normal map display 74 provided in the batch display device 50 as a process of executing the normal map variation display game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the variable display game of the normal map, which stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result, is performed. It should be noted that the normal figure display 74 is composed of the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the figures in a predetermined time variation, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. It may be configured.

If the result of the solenoid variable display game is a hit, the solenoid display 74 is provided with a lighting pattern that is either the first hit stop symbol or the second hit stop symbol that has a special result mode according to the type of hit. Along with displaying a stop, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to control the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to be opened for a predetermined time. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display 74 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the deviation.

Further, the winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). In addition to storing, the second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory and the second start memory. Then, the number of stored start memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display at a predetermined position on the center case 40. Will be done.

Then, when the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 is in a state where the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game can be started, it is stored in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The hit / miss random value for jackpot determination is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit / miss of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

Then, when the first special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display 51 (variation display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 1 changing display, the process of displaying the first special figure changing display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. Further, when executing the second special figure fluctuation display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 2 changing display, the process of displaying the second special figure changing display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 (variation display device) corresponds to a special figure fluctuation display game and has a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, etc.). Decorative special figure that changes the display of the variable display Process to display the variable display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs, based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

In the decorative special symbol variation display game in the display device 41, for example, in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is displayed in the left variable display area (first special symbol) and the right variable display area (1st special symbol). In each of the second special symbol) and the medium fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variablely displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed at which it is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode composed of the displayed identification information. Further, in the display device 41, various effect displays such as changes in display colors and variation modes are performed in order to improve the interest.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a lighting pattern as a special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, and also specially. Performs processing to generate a game state. In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode.

In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by the lower prize winning opening solenoid 38b, and the game ball flows into the lower winning opening. The opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39 is opened by the upper prize winning opening solenoid 39b, and the control is performed so that the game ball can flow into the upper winning opening. Then, until either a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening, the large winning opening Is set as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h of the first special variation winning device 38 in the specific round, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as the game state after the end of the special game state. ing. This high-probability state is a state in which the probability of a special result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the 1st special figure fluctuation display game or the 2nd special figure fluctuation display game, the 1st special figure fluctuation display game and the 2nd special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state in the normal figure) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is set to a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure.

For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal map variation display game to be a second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map variation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time. Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is longer than the first opening time in the normal state. 2 It is possible to control the opening time. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the normal variable winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first is opened with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set to. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the low probability (for example, 0/251) in the normal operating state (for example) 250/251. It is possible to

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states in which different things are changed. In this embodiment, the movable member 37b is set not to be opened in the normal operating state (probability of normal drawing is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variable display may be displayed independently or not at the same time. The game is displayed. Further, the display device 41 may also use different display devices and different display areas in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed so that they are not executed independently or at the same time. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are executed in the order in which the start memory is generated. Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

7 and 8 show the operations of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 in the special gaming state. There are five types of special results, 12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, 5R normal, 4R probability variation, and 4R normal, and they are selected based on the jackpot symbol random number. The number of each jackpot type indicates the number of rounds, and the probability change indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into the probability change operation area 38h and is likely to be in a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state. Indicates that there is a low possibility that the game ball will flow into the probability variation operation region 38h, and it is unlikely that the game ball will be in the high probability state (probability variation state) after the end of the special gaming state. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball will be in the high probability state depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h. Therefore, even if the jackpot type is the probability variation, the probability variation operation region 38h If the game ball does not flow into the game ball, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, if the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h, the high probability state occurs.

FIG. 7 shows an opening mode in each round for each jackpot type. The details of the opening mode are shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the 12R probability variation, the lower V opening that opens the first special variable winning device 38 is performed in the first round. The lower V opening is an opening mode in which the game ball is likely to flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. Then, from the second round onward, the upper long opening that opens the second special variable winning device 39 and the lower long opening that opens the first special variable winning device 38 are alternately performed. Similarly, in the 5R probability variation and the 4R probability variation in which the jackpot type is a probability variation, the lower V opening that opens the first special variation winning device 38 is performed in the first round. Further, in 5R normal and 4R normal in which the jackpot type is normal, a lower short opening is performed in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the first round. The lower short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility that the game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h is lower than that of the lower V opening.

In any of the jackpot types, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are configured to be opened alternately, so that a predetermined opening time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls win. After the end of the round, the other special variable winning device is opened when a predetermined interval time elapses. It should be noted that the game ball can flow into the probability variation operation region 38h only in the lower V opening and the lower short opening performed in the first round. Since the upper long opening and the upper short opening open the second special variable winning device 39, there is no possibility that the game ball will flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. Further, since the lever member 38i is not operated when the lower long opening or the lower short opening which is not the first round is opened, there is no possibility that the game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h. That is, in the game machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is the round in which the game ball may flow into the probability variation operation region 38h forming the specific region, is the first round. Of course, this specific round may be a round other than the first round.

As shown in FIG. 8A, in the upper long opening, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened with the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25,000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) is opened. When either condition of winning the game ball is satisfied, the second special variable winning device 39 is closed to end the round (t12). After that, the interval time and the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening are started (t12), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t13). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the special gaming state, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are configured to be alternately opened, so that the first special variable winning device 39 is alternately opened as the interval time elapses. Although the device 38 is opened, the second special variable winning device 39 continues the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper prize opening. Further, the lower short opening shown in FIG. 8B is the same as the upper long opening except that the opening time and the interval time are different.

As shown in FIG. 8C, when the lower V is opened, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Further, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on with the start of the round, and the probability variation operation area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member 38i covers the probabilistic operating region 38h and the game ball cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member 38i retracts from the probabilistic operating region 38h. The game ball is ready to flow in. Further, the state in which the probability variation operation area switch 38d is effective is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the probability variation operation area switch 38d is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the probability variation operation area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the probability variation operation area switch 38d detects a game ball, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off 64 ms after the start of the round (t32). Then, 100 ms after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability variation operation area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, the game ball that has won a prize immediately after the first special variable winning device 38 is opened may flow into the probability variation operating region 38h.

200 ms after the start of the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, when 2700 ms have elapsed, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again (t35), and either the condition that the openable time of 25000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls is won is satisfied. Then, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t39). After that, the interval time and the remaining ball processing time of the lower prize opening are started (t39), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t41).

Further, after the second opening (t35) of the first special variable winning device 38, the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Further, the probability variation operation area switch 38d is also effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is for a sufficiently long time, and the lever solenoid 38f remains ON for a long time, so that the game ball almost certainly flows into the probability variation operating region 38h. It will be. Therefore, when the jackpot type is probabilistic, it will almost certainly be in a high probability state.

Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be turned on for a predetermined time even after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variable winning device 38 just before closing. It is possible for the game ball to flow into the probabilistic operating region 38h. The first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are processed as the remaining balls in the lower prize opening. If all of them are discharged within the time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is terminated at the end of the remaining ball processing time (t42), and the probability variation operation area switch 38d is invalidated.

In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and all the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time. If not all of the lever solenoid 38f is discharged by the end of the period (t43) in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off when the discharge is completed and the operation is terminated. , The probabilistic working area switch 38d becomes invalid.

In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing time. If not all of the lever solenoid 38f is discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43) The lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is terminated. In this case, the probability variation operation area switch 38d becomes invalid (t44) 100 ms after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43).

As shown in FIG. 8D, in the lower short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the lower V opening is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is completed. End the round (t54). Since the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for a very short time and the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a short time, it is unlikely that the game ball will flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. Therefore, it is rare that a high probability state occurs when the jackpot type is normal.

The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the activation / invalidation of the probability variation operation area switch are performed in the same manner as in the case of lower V opening as long as the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 (t56). ~ T63). Therefore, if the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the processing time of the remaining ball in the lower large winning opening has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. The operation is terminated, and the probability variation operation area switch 38d becomes invalid. If all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62). After 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t62) after the operation is terminated in the state, the probability variation operation area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

However, when the lower short is opened, the lever solenoid 38f and the probability variation operating area switch 38d are controlled as shown in FIG. 8 (d) only when the lower short is opened in the first round. When the lower short is opened in other rounds, the lever solenoid 38f is not operated and the probability variation operation area switch 38d remains invalid. In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 8E, in the lower long opening, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (t61) with the start of the round, and the openable time of 25,000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) When either condition of winning the game ball is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed to end the round (t62). After that, the interval time and the remaining ball processing time of the lower prize opening are started (t62), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t63). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set. In this lower long opening, the lever solenoid 38f is left in the OFF state, and the probability variation operation area switch 38d is also left in the invalid state.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 14 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step S4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can avoid missing commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the standby time has elapsed. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S8). When the timer value is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step S13). ), Output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read first. However, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

When the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17), and it is normal. If (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), the checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step S20). When the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 of FIG. 10, and processing is performed when the power is normally restored from the power failure. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a legitimacy determining means for determining the validity of predetermined data stored in the storage means (RAM 111C) when the supply of electric power to the game machine is started.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksums are not normal (does not match) (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 of FIG. 10 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

In step S21 of FIG. 10, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indefinite state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.
After that, the area in the RWM for storing the game state is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator, error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is provided. The on (lighting) data of the third game status display unit 78) is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S25), and step S31. Proceed to. In the case of this embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a command on the customer waiting demo screen if waiting for a customer, and other commands) If so, send multiple commands such as the recovery screen command). That is, when the legitimacy is confirmed by the legitimacy determining means, the game is restarted based on the data stored in the storage means.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps S16, S17, S18, and S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to the access permission (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and a predetermined time (for example, for example) (30 seconds) Send multiple commands such as (command to notify RAM initialization by light and sound).

In step S31, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure). Save in a predetermined area of RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (hit random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure (win symbol random number)) From (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, hit random number, and hit symbol random number are timer interrupts that are processing units of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the processing. In addition, for jackpot symbol random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit symbol random numbers, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. There is. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure occurs. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step S35, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which causes the main processing. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S39), all. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ), And then wait for the power of the game machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the activation of the main control means and waiting for the activation of the slave control device at the time of turning on the power, and the predetermined standby time. The occurrence of a power outage will be monitored in.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the game control device 100 is configured for a predetermined period. When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the fact that the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

FIG. 11 shows the types of model designation commands that are one of the commands transmitted in steps S25 and S30. In the game machine of the present embodiment, the model type A is a plurality of model types having different control contents such as the probability of a big hit, the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in a time saving state, the big hit type and distribution, and the distribution of the effect. There are four types, ~ D. Further, each model type includes a plurality of types of models having different model names. For example, the model type A includes three types of model names A-1, A-2, and A-3.

In the game control device 100, any one of a plurality of model types is set, and one of the plurality of model names included in the model type is set. .. The model designation command differs depending on the model type and model name, and when the power is turned on, the model designation command corresponding to the model type and model name set in the game control device 100 is transmitted to the effect control device 300. ..

The effect control device 300 can grasp the model type and the model name set in the game control device 100 based on the received model designation command. Then, the default symbol corresponding to the received model designation command is displayed on the display device 41. As a result, the model type and model name of the model can be confirmed by confirming the display of the display device 41 when the power is turned on.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the command is composed of MODE and ACTION, and in the model designation command, it is set as a value indicating that MODE is a model designation command (05H in this case), and ACTION depends on the model type and model name. It is a value. For example, when the model type is A and the model name is A-1, a model specification command with MODE of 05H and ACTION of 61H is transmitted as a model specification command. Then, based on the effect control device 300 receiving the model designation command of 05H for this MODE and 61H for the ACTION, it is grasped that the model type A is the model name A-1, and the display device 41 is used as the default symbol. Display 131.

In the default design, the upper two digits correspond to the model type and the lower one digit corresponds to the model name, so that the model type and model name can be easily confirmed. Of course, the default symbol is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 11, and can be set arbitrarily. However, a symbol that is a combination of reach (for example, 767) and a symbol that is a combination of jackpots (for example, 777) may not be used. Further, the default symbol may be a symbol combination that can appear in the decorative special symbol variable display game, or may be a symbol combination that does not appear in the decorative special symbol variable display game. Further, each symbol included in the default symbol may be a symbol other than the identification information of the decorative special figure variation display game in part or in whole. Further, although the default symbol is a symbol corresponding to the model type and the model name, it may be a symbol corresponding to only one of the model type and the model name.

Further, the second default symbol may be displayed after displaying the default symbol corresponding to the model type and the model name for a certain period of time. The second default symbol may be any one, but for example, it may be a common symbol regardless of the model type and model name, and the appearance may be the same even for game machines of the same model but different model types. .. Further, the second default symbol may be a symbol common to other models. Further, the game store may be able to set a second default symbol.

[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 12 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19, S43) in the above-mentioned main process. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and "0" is set as the calculated value (step S53). .. The number of bytes of the RAM used is set in the number of repetitions.

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is used as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and the checksum is checked. It is determined whether or not the calculation of is completed (step S57). If the calculation is not completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 13 shows the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the above-mentioned main process. In this initial value random number update process, the jackpot symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62), and the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63). The initial value random number update process is terminated.
Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop symbol of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the "hit initial value random number" is the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game. The random number that is the initial value of, "hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the normal figure variation display game. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 14 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step S101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM.
Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different.
Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) are performed.

Next, based on the output data set in various processes, drive control of actuators such as solenoids (lower prize winning opening solenoid 38b, upper winning opening solenoid 39b, normal electric solenoid 37c, lever solenoid 38f) is performed. Output processing (step S104) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step S105), the random number update process 1 (step S106), and the random number update process 2 (step S107) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed.
Next, whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a in the normal drawing, the winning port switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, and the upper winning opening switch 39a. The winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108) for monitoring the error and monitoring the error (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened, etc.) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S109). An abnormal discharge error means that the discharge from the upper flow path 38j is detected even though the game ball existing in the upper flow path 38j is 0, or the game ball existing in the lower flow path 38k is 0. Nevertheless, it is to detect the discharge from the lower flow path 38k (see FIG. 81). If an abnormal discharge error is occurring, the abnormal discharge error flag is set.

If an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S109; Y), the process proceeds to step S113. That is, the game is prevented from progressing. When the abnormal discharge error is not occurring (step S109; N), the special figure game process (step S110) for processing the special figure variation display game and the normal figure game process (step S110) for performing the process related to the normal figure variation display game. S111), a segment LED editing process (step S112) is performed, which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents.

Next, the abnormality emission monitoring process (step S113), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S114) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality, and the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62. The panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S115), which checks and determines whether or not there is an abnormality, is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S116) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed to end the timer interrupt process.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (step S103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), and the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124). ), The address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S125). After that, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is an inverting bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S127), and the switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, "preparation" means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or other memory.

Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). After that, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is an inverting bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S132), the switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is completed.

Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 are different data, but there is a possibility that the data have the same value as a result. is there.
Further, the inverted bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the inverted bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, but there is a possibility that the data have the same value as a result. is there.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps S128, S133) in the above-mentioned input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and saved in the port input state of the target switch control area. (Store) (step S144).
After that, it waits for the delay time (for example, about 100 μsec) until the second reading elapses (step S145).

When the delay time elapses, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read a second time (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and the port input state (1) of the target switch control area. The second data) is loaded, and the inverted data (second data) is saved (stored) in the port input state (step S149).
After that, a fixed bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 1 and the bits having different states are 0 in the first and second readings (step S150), and the logical product of the fixed bit pattern and the port input state is taken and confirmed this time. Let it be a bit (step S151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 0 and the bits having different states are 1 in the first and second readings (step S152), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt. The product is taken and used as the previous holding bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state in which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed.
Then, the fixed bit this time and the held bit last time are combined and saved as the fixed state of this time (step S154), the exclusive OR of the fixed state of the previous time and the fixed state of this time is taken, and saved as the rising edge (step S155). , Ends the switch read process.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt process, and the signal is compared with the result of the previous read. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has changed, but if this is done, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be possible. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 that outputs the data of the lower prize winning port solenoid 38b, the upper prize winning port solenoid 39b, the normal electric solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f is synthesized and output (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit line of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step). S164). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, "door / frame opening" data, "security signal" data) is output as a digit / external information output port. Output to 136 (step S166).

After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S168). As a result, a plurality of light emitting display units provided in the batch display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S169), and the combined data (for example, "big hit signal 1" data, "big hit signal 2" data, "big hit signal 3" data, and "big hit signal" are combined. 4 ”data,“ symbol confirmation count signal ”data,“ start port signal ”data,“ main prize ball signal ”data) and launch permission output data are combined (step S170), and the combined data is combined. It outputs to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / launch permission signal (step S171).
Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S173).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S175). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S176), the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prizes for which the payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter that can store information related to the prize ball command.

The prize number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). The winning data corresponding to the prize balls that are used and have not been processed to generate the main prize ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter that can store information about the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). By collating these two signals, it is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas is divided into prize ball number counter areas (3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls in the case of this embodiment) set for each prize opening. Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is added by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated to a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, and more untransmitted signals are sent. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 prizes can be stored in each of the 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1. , The 3 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area are configured to store up to 255 prizes, respectively.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, the winning number counter area to be checked is "0". Determine if there is a count that is not.
Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the prize number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the prize number counter areas is completed. Determine (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 is updated. The number of payouts corresponding to the address of is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S187). As the value of the prize ball remaining number region before this processing, a fraction that is less than a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. When it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output number region is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S191), and the process returns to the process of step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls such as during a big hit is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accuracy generated during the big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processes of steps S181 to S191 are processes of updating (increasing) the number of output times of the main prize ball signal, and the processes of steps S192 to S201 are processes of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. When the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in a busy state (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on (busy state). Will be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

When the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out the prize ball. It is configured to send a payout command when it is in a state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not send the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

The conditions for turning on the payout busy signal (busy state) are, for example, during the payout operation, during the ball lending operation, during the shoot ball out error, during the overflow error, during the frame radio wave fraud, and the payout ball detection switch (payout). Counting the number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (number of unpaid prize balls = remaining number of acquired game balls) during an abnormality (switch for monitoring the balls), an error of insufficient payout, an error of overpayment ) Is present (when it is not 0), etc.

When the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, the winning number counter area to be checked is "0". Determine if there is a count that is not.

Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the prize number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the prize number counter areas is completed. Determine (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is updated. Acquire the payout number command corresponding to the address of (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is completed. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. If so, it serves as a prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

Since the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200 in this way, the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so that it will be backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure, and will be backed up by the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function to do so.

In a conventional game machine (for example, a game machine of JP-A-2000-321759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data to its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, which has a problem of increasing the cost. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized even if the payout control device 200 does not have a function for backing up.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the prize ball is paid out by an external device such as a hall computer. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter that can store the information about the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter that can store the information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

Based on the above, the game is controlled in an integrated manner, and the winning areas provided in the game area 32 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38, second). A game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the special variable winning device 39), and a game ball payout based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. A payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling is provided, and the game control means is a state signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. ) Is used to control the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means, and when a power failure occurs and the player recovers from the power failure, the payout control means outputs a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started. Even if this is the case, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is continuously output from the payout control means over a predetermined period. This means that the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, a plurality of winning areas (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) having different numbers of winning balls are provided in the game area 32. The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can specify whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls has not been transmitted for each number of prize balls. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The status signal specifies whether or not the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. It will be.

In addition, the game is controlled in an integrated manner, and the predetermined winning areas (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) are entered. A game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on a winning of a game ball, and a payout control means (payout) that controls payout of a game ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes a control device 200), and the game control means indicates that the payout control can be started by a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control. Information on the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) that transmits the prize ball command to the payout control means and the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in the predetermined winning area. An external information output means (game control device 100) that outputs a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including the prize ball signal to the outside of the game machine is provided, and the external information output means is a state signal output from the payout control means. It means that the prize ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control.

Further, even if the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) indicates that the status signal can start the payout control when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can store information about the prize ball command and a prize that can store information about the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) is provided with a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, first One prize ball when a prize ball command is generated in units of one prize in the special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39) and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The command is configured to be transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store the winning information in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. Therefore, the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be reduced by updating when the game ball is won in the predetermined winning area and updating in correspondence with the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in connection with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined winning area, and outputs the prize ball signal every time the accumulated value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is configured to be output to the outside, and can store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, and is updated when the game ball is won in the predetermined winning area. At the same time, by updating in correspondence with the cumulative processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not been cumulatively processed yet.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 19 shows a random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In the random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).

When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the hit random number of the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).
When the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is supported. It is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be used (step S213). After that, it is determined whether the hit random number in the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

When the hit random number of the normal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).
When the hit random number of the normal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial value of the loaded normal figure hit random number is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S216). After that, it is determined whether the hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

When the hit symbol random number of the normal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated.
When the hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the hit symbol random number of the loaded normal figure is loaded. The next initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S219), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 20 shows the random number update process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 1) as variable pattern random numbers, and the random number update process 2 updates both of them. Then, each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to.

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step S231). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Then, when the value of the random number update scan counter is "0", the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when it is "1", the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when it is "2", the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated. The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is "3", the variable pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the referenced table based on the calculated address (step S234). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, the CPU used as the game microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as "R register") used for refreshing the DRAM, and instead. In addition, a counter called "M1 counter" that operates in the same manner as the R register is built in, and the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). Randomness can be added to random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter.
Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 are used. Is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter when updating. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4-bit is illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number region (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). When the random number region is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the addition value (hereinafter, this). Is set to the mask update value obtained by adding "1" to "masked value"), the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. When the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as the addition value (step S236; N). Step S238) and step S239. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before addition. is there.

Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239), and when it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), Proceed to step S242. When the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1) is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. Byte) is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S242, a value obtained by adding the added value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random number value is used as a new random number value, and it is determined whether or not the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step). S243). Then, when the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random number value is saved in the random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245). When the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as the new random number value again (step S244), and this value is set to 1. It is saved in the random number area lower than the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number region is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. In the case of a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.
In the case of this embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated (1-byte random number, 2-byte random number (upper), 2-byte random number (lower)) are displayed on the effect random number update table. , The address of the update area, etc. are defined for the types of random numbers to be updated (4 blocks).

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37. Random number update means for updating random numbers.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 21 shows a winning port switch / status monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the winning opening switch (upper grand winning opening switch 39a) in the upper winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is prepared (step). S301), the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S302) is executed to monitor whether or not there is an illegal winning in the upper winning opening even though the upper winning opening is not open and to detect a normal winning.

In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input in the target switch, a lower address of fraudulent monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, a fraudulent winning error notification command, and a fraudulent winning Information on the upper limit of the number (number of fraud occurrence judgments) and the address of the winning opening switch table is defined. Further, in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, in addition to the number of times of monitoring repetition (number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are displayed for each switch. Information on the lower address of is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

After that, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the winning opening switch (lower large winning opening switch 38a) in the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored for illegal winning. At the same time, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S304) for detecting a normal winning is executed.

Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the Fuden (normal variable winning device 37) (step S305), monitor for illegal winning, and obtain a normal winning. The fraud & winning monitoring process (step S306) to be detected is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36 and the winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35) that can always win a prize is prepared (step S307), and the number of winnings is obtained. The winning number counter update process (step S308) is performed.

Next, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches for monitoring the status and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.
After that, the game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a game machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the game machine status monitoring table 1, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to a disconnection of the switch connector or the like. The state monitoring based on the detection signal 1 is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", the state monitoring based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. To.

Next, the game machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a game machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the game machine state monitoring table 2, and when the value of the state scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch 63. The status monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "1", the status monitoring based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the frame radio wave invalid signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S314), and if the value of the state scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the process proceeds to step S318. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the game machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine determines the status such as whether an error has occurred. The state check process (step S316) is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the game machine status monitoring table 3, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. Status monitoring based on the detection signal 2 is set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is from "1" to "3".

After that, the payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control is performed, and the process proceeds to step S318. Since the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", it is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

Next, a V abnormal passage monitoring process (step S318) for monitoring the detection of an abnormal input on the probability variation operation area switch 38d is performed, and a residual ball monitoring process (step S319) for monitoring the game ball remaining in the upper flow path 38j is performed. I do. Further, a discharge ball monitoring process (step S320) for monitoring the game ball remaining in the lower flow path 38k is performed to end the winning opening switch / state monitoring process.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 22 shows fraud & winning monitoring processing (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing. This fraud & winning monitoring process is applied to the lower large winning opening switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning opening switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, and the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. This is the process to be performed. For the large prize opening (1st special variable prize device 38, 2nd special variable prize device 39) and Fuden (normal variable prize device 37), forcibly open the opening / closing member to insert the game ball and pay out the prize ball. Since fraud is easy to occur, fraud is monitored in addition to detecting prizes.

In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be error-monitored is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is the period in which the flag is set during the lower grand prize opening fraud monitoring period when the winning slot switch subject to error monitoring is the lower grand prize opening switch 38a, and the winning slot switch targeted for error monitoring is If it is the upper prize opening switch 39a, it is the period during which the flag is set during the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period, and if the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the start opening 2 switch 37a, it is a hit in the normal figure. Based on this, it is a period other than the state in which the open control of the normal variable winning device 37 is being executed.

Then, in the case of the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step S323). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the process proceeds to step S332. Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the number of illegal winnings of the target is updated by +1 (step S324), and the updated number of illegal winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored. It is determined whether or not there is (step S325).

In the case of the present embodiment, the number of fraud occurrence determinations is set to 5 regardless of the type of the winning slot switch to be error-monitored, but the number of fraud occurrences is defined to be different for each type of winning slot switch. You can also do it.
The reason why the number of judgments is set to 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state or the general electric signal is converted to the closed state, the game ball is sandwiched between the large winning opening or the opening / closing member of the general electric light, and the game ball wins a prize. This is to prevent it from being judged as illegal when a prize is won after the valid period of the mouth switch or when the signal is noisy, and it is not easily judged as an error even though it is not illegal.

Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (step S325; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330).
When the number of fraudulent prizes is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations to be monitored (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent prizes is limited to the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (step S326), and the initial value is set in the target fraudulent prize notification timer area. (For example, 60,000 msec) is saved (step S327). Next, the target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), the fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as the fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338). ).

On the other hand, when the fraud monitoring period is not in progress (step S322; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330), and the winning number counter update process (step S331) for setting the winning ball is performed. If the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S332). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.
Then, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S333), and if the value is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value is 0 (step S333; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the target illegal release command is prepared (step S334), and the illegal prize release flag is set as the illegal flag. Prepare (step S335). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).

When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( Step S337), the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338).
If the value of the notification timer is not 0 (step S336; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. Compare with the value of the invalid flag area (step S338).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S338; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process ends.
If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (step S338; N), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (step S339), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S340), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
FIG. 23 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps S308, S331) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input (correctly, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch is checked. Determine (step S352).

When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362).
When there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether or not it overflows (step S355). When no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). When an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S354, the counter for the prize ball (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

After loading the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether or not it overflows (step S359). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). , It is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362). When an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step S362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the target winning opening switch has an input (step S352). When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362; Y), the winning number counter update process is completed. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Game machine status check process]
FIG. 24 shows the game machine state check process (steps S311, S313, S316) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this game machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step S371), and it is determined whether or not the signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

Information corresponding to the status scan counter is defined in the status monitoring table (game machine status monitoring table prepared by the winning opening switch / status monitoring process). This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the state monitoring area, the lower address of the port input state area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, the mask data for extracting only the bit of the target signal, and the signal. On judgment data, status off command (in the case of an error system, an error notification end command is issued), status on command (in the case of an error system, an error notification start command is issued), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer Includes comparison values.

When the target signal is not on (step S372; N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step S373), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S374). After that, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S375), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). The case where the target signal is not on (step S372; N) is a state indicating that the error-type signal is not an error (normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S372; Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step S376), and the target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S377). After that, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). The case where the target signal is on (step S372; Y) is a state indicating that the error-type signal is an error (abnormal or invalid), and the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is a state showing.

When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step S379; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382). , It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383).
Further, when the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state do not match (step S379; N), that is, when the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area (step S379; N). Step S380). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S381), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or higher than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S381). Step S383).

If the value of the target status monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N), the gaming machine status check process ends.
When the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step S384) to prepare. The resulting state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step S385).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S385; Y), the game machine state check process ends.
If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S387), the game machine state check process is completed. As a result, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 25 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

When the payout busy signal is on (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and an on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S393). It is determined whether the value in the busy signal state region matches the state of the current signal (step S396).
When the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S394), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S395). , It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state region matches the state of the current signal (step S396). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interrupts.

If the value in the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S396; N), the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. Then (step S398), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).
Further, when the value of the busy signal state region matches the state of the current signal (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400), and if it is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The payout busy signal check process is terminated. When the value is equal to or higher than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step S401), and prepared in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check process ends.

This process sets the busy signal status based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the status of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, but the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues for the signal confirmation time. It is difficult to be affected by such factors.

Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and becomes an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal confirmation time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the device recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200 even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is issued to the payout control device 200 in response to a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200, which is not transmitted to the payout control device 200. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and surely grasps that the payout process can be performed immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being damaged.

[V abnormal passage monitoring process]
FIG. 26 shows the V abnormal passage monitoring process (step S318) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this V abnormal passage monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation operation region 38h is effective (step S411). The probabilistic operating region 38h is in effect when the detection of the game ball by the probabilistic operating region switch 38d is treated as valid (see FIG. 8). When the probability variation operation region 38h is in effect (step S411; Y), the process proceeds to step S418. Further, when the probability variation operation region 38h is not valid (step S411; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the probability variation operation region switch (step S412).

Then, when there is no input in the probability change operation area switch (step S412; N), the process proceeds to step S418.
Further, when there is an input to the probability change operation area switch (step S412; Y), the process related to the occurrence of the V abnormal passage error after step S413 is performed. The lever member 38i can flow into the probabilistic operating region 38h only when the lever member 38i is retracted from the probabilistic operating region 38h. The period during which the probability change operation area switch 38d is effective is started when the lever member 38i is retracted, and the game ball that has flowed in after the lever member 38i is in a state of covering the probability change operation area 38h is in the probability change operation area. It ends when a predetermined time sufficient to be detected by the switch 38d has elapsed, or when the lever member 38i covers the probability variation operation region 38h. Therefore, when the probability variation operation area switch 38d is not active, the fact that the probability variation operation area switch 38d has an input is an abnormal state that does not normally occur, and processing related to the occurrence of a V abnormal passage error is performed.

In the process related to the occurrence of the V abnormal passage error, first, the initial value (here, the value corresponding to 60 seconds) is saved in the V abnormal passage notification timer area (step S413), and the value in the V abnormal passage flag area is the error occurring flag. (Step S414).
Then, when the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is the error occurrence flag (step S414; Y), that is, when the error has already occurred, the V abnormal passage monitoring process is terminated.

If the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is not the error occurring flag (step S414; N), that is, if an error is determined in this processing, the error occurring flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area (step S414; N). Step S415), prepare a V abnormal passage occurrence command (step S416). After that, the effect command setting process is performed (step S417), and the V abnormal passage monitoring process is terminated. The effect control device 300 performs a process of notifying an error when a V abnormal passage occurrence command is received.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S418, it is determined whether the V abnormality passage notification timer is 0 (step S418).
Then, when the V abnormal passage notification timer is 0 (step S418; Y), the V abnormal passage monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the V abnormal passage error is not occurring.
If the V abnormal passage notification timer is not 0 (step S418; N), the V abnormal passage notification timer is updated by -1 (step S419), and it is determined whether the V abnormal passage notification timer has become 0 (step S420). ).

If the V abnormal passage notification timer is not 0 (step S420; N), the V abnormal passage monitoring process ends. In this case, the notification of the V abnormal passage error continues.
When the V abnormal passage notification timer becomes 0 (step S420; Y), the normal status flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area (step S421), and the V abnormal passage release command is prepared (step S422). .. After that, the effect command setting process is performed (step S423), and the V abnormal passage monitoring process is terminated. The effect control device 300 performs a process of terminating the error notification when the V abnormal passage release command is received.

[Residual ball monitoring process]
FIG. 27 shows the remaining ball monitoring process (step S319) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this remaining ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the passage port switch 38g that detects the game ball that has not flowed into the probability variation operation region 38h (step S431). If there is no input to the passage switch 38g (step S431; N), the process proceeds to step S433. When there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S431; Y), if the remaining ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is not 0, the remaining ball counter is updated by -1 (step S432), and step S433. Move to.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation operation area switch 38d has an input (step S433), and if there is no input (step S433; N), the process proceeds to step S435. Further, when there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch 38d (step S433; Y), if the remaining ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is not 0, the remaining ball counter is updated by -1 (step S434), and the step. Move to S435.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the lower prize winning opening switch (step S435), and if there is no input (step S435; N), the process proceeds to step S438.
When there is an input to the lower prize opening switch (step S435; Y), the remaining ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is updated by +1 (step S436), and the remaining ball monitoring timer area is entered. The initial value of the timer is saved (step S437), and the process proceeds to step S438. The remaining ball monitoring timer is for determining a remaining ball error when the game ball stays in the upper flow path 38j for a long time. Here, as an initial value, a time sufficiently longer than the time required from the time of flowing into the upper flow path 38j to the time of being discharged without any abnormality is set. Further, since the value is updated by -1 by the following processing, it is set so that 3 seconds can be clocked by saving a value of +1 corresponding to 3 seconds as an initial value.

Next, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step S438), and when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step S438; Y), that is, when there is no game ball in the upper flow path 38j, the remaining ball The error clearing flag is prepared (step S444), and the remaining ball error clearing command is prepared (step S445). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining sphere error flag region (step S446).

On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step S438; N), that is, if there is a game ball in the upper flow path 38j, it is determined whether a remaining ball error is already occurring (step S439). If a remaining ball error is already occurring (step S439; Y), the remaining ball monitoring process ends. If the remaining ball error has not already occurred (step S439; N), the remaining ball monitoring timer is updated by -1 (step S440), and it is determined whether the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S441).

If the remaining ball monitoring timer is not 0 (step S441; N), the remaining ball monitoring process ends. When the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S441; Y), the remaining ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step S442), and the remaining ball error occurrence command is prepared (step S443). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining sphere error flag region (step S446).

When the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S446; Y), the remaining ball monitoring process ends.
If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S446; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the remaining ball error flag area (step S447), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S448), the remaining ball monitoring process is completed. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting error notification based on the reception of the remaining ball error occurrence command, and performs a process of ending the error notification based on the reception of the remaining ball error release command.

That is, by the above processing, if all the game balls are not discharged from the upper flow path 38j even after a predetermined time (here, 3 seconds) has passed from the last inflow of the game balls into the upper flow path 38j, the game remains. It is judged as a ball error. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as leaving a game ball (thread fishing ball) with a thread attached in the upper flow path 38j.

[Discharge ball monitoring process]
FIG. 28 shows the discharge ball monitoring process (step S320) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this discharge ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e that detects the game ball discharged from the lower flow path 38k, that is, the game ball discharged from the first special variable winning device 38. (Step S451). If there is no input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S451; N), the process proceeds to step S453. When there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S451; Y), if the discharge ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is not 0, the discharge ball counter is updated by -1 (step S452), and step S453. Move to.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the passage port switch 38g that detects the game ball that has not flowed into the probability variation operation region 38h (step S453), and if there is no input (step S453; N), the process proceeds to step S456. To do. When there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S453; Y), the discharge ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step S454), and a timer is set in the discharge ball monitoring timer area. The initial value is saved (step S455), and the process proceeds to step S456.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the probability change operation area switch 38d that detects the game ball that has flowed into the probability change operation area 38h (step S456), and if there is no input (step S456; N), the process proceeds to step S459. ..
When there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch 38d (step S456; Y), the discharge ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step S457), and the discharge ball monitoring timer area is set. The initial value of the timer is saved (step S458), and the process proceeds to step S459.

The passage port switch 38g and the probability variation operation area switch 38d also have a function as a switch for detecting the game ball flowing into the lower flow path 38k, and the discharge ball counter is increased by +1 based on the detection of the game ball by these switches. Update and save the timer initial value in the discharge ball monitoring timer area. The discharge ball monitoring timer is for determining a discharge ball error when the game ball stays in the lower flow path 38k for a long time. Here, as an initial value, a time sufficiently longer than the time required from the time of flowing into the lower flow path 38k to the time of being discharged without any abnormality is set. Further, since the value is updated by -1 by the following processing, it is set so that 3 seconds can be clocked by saving a value of +1 corresponding to 3 seconds as an initial value.

Next, it is determined whether the discharge ball counter is 0 (step S459), and when the discharge ball counter is 0 (step S459; Y), that is, when there is no game ball in the lower flow path 38k, the discharge ball The error clearing flag is prepared (step S465), and the discharge ball error clearing command is prepared (step S466). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharge ball error flag region (step S467).

On the other hand, if the discharge ball counter is not 0 (step S459; N), that is, if there is a game ball in the lower flow path 38k, it is determined whether a discharge ball error has already occurred (step S460). Then, when the discharge ball error has already occurred (step S460; Y), the discharge ball monitoring process is terminated. If the discharge ball error has not already occurred (step S460; N), the discharge ball monitoring timer is updated by -1 (step S461), and it is determined whether the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S462).

If the discharge ball monitoring timer is not 0 (step S462; N), the discharge ball monitoring process ends. When the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S462; Y), the discharge ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step S463), and the discharge ball error generation command is prepared (step S464). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharge ball error flag region (step S467).

When the prepared state flag matches the value in the discharge ball error flag area (step S467; Y), the discharge ball monitoring process ends.
If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step S467; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the discharge ball error flag area (step S468), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S448), the discharge ball monitoring process is completed. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error occurrence command, and performs a process of ending the error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error release command.

That is, by the above processing, if all the game balls have not been discharged from the lower flow path 38k even after a predetermined time (here, 3 seconds) has passed from the last inflow of the game balls into the lower flow path 38k, the game balls are discharged. It is judged as a ball error. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as leaving a game ball (thread fishing ball) with a thread attached in the lower flow path 38k.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step S110) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and special features based on the winning are obtained. Figure Fluctuation display The game result pre-judgment is performed to determine the game result based on the winning in advance before the start of the game.

Next, the upper prize opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the upper grand prize opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the upper grand prize opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 is performed.
Further, the lower prize opening switch monitoring process (step A3) is performed. In this lower grand prize opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the lower grand prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is performed.

After that, the probability change operation area switch monitoring process (step A4) is performed. In this probabilistic operation area switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the probabilistic operation area switch 38d provided in the probabilistic operation area 38h is performed.
Next, the remaining ball processing timer update process (step A5) is performed. In this remaining ball processing timer update process, a process of managing the large winning opening remaining ball processing time set after the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are closed is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A6). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A7).
When the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A7; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, refer to it in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be used is set in the register (step A8), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A9). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A10).

In step A10, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change is in progress. A special figure normal process (step A11) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
In step A10, when the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A12) is performed.

In step A10, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. The special figure display processing (step A13) for setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step A10, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A14).
In step A10, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step A15) for setting the information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

In step A10, when the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged and the jackpot end process are performed. The large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A16) for setting the information necessary for the operation is performed.
In step A10, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the jackpot end process (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A18), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A19) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A20), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A21) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. After that, the lever solenoid control process (step A22) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed to end the special figure game process.
On the other hand, in step A7, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A7; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A18, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the first start port (starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to perform the first step. 1 It is determined whether or not there is a prize in the starting port (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting port (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the first starting port (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (during normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. .. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) must be hit left to win a prize, and the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37) must be hit right. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the first starting port during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to strike right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of holding by the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A109), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the second starting port. Determine (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting port (step A111; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, the ordinary variation. When it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning ball can be won (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step The process proceeds to the process of A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the electric power fraud is occurring (step A113).

In the determination of whether or not the fraudulent occurrence of the normal electric power is occurring, it is determined that the fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In step A113, if it is determined that the electric power fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting the holding information by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A114), the special feature. Figure The start port switch common process (step A115) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process.
If it is determined in step A113 that an illegal electric power is being generated (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, among the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), information on the starting port to be monitored without winning is obtained. It is set (step A121), and it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122).
Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends.
On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124). ..

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends.
If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), the winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed. finish.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 32, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is transmitted to the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). ).
When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135.
On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" due to the +1 update, so that it is determined that the number of outputs overflows and the update is not performed.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step A135).
If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.
If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1 ( Step A136), the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A137), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A138).

Next, the target start port winning flag is saved (step A139), the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A140), and the preparation is performed in step A125. The big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step A141). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A142), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A143).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A144), and the address of the variation order flag storage area corresponding to the total of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number. Is calculated (step A145), and the target variation order flag is saved in the calculated area (step A146). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first start memory and the second start memory are digested in the order of occurrence, and the variation order flag storage areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the digestion order are stored as variation order flags in FIG. Alternatively, the digestion order of the starting memory is managed by storing the information of the special figure 2.
After that, the special figure reservation information determination process (step A147) for determining the information about the start memory before the digestion of the start memory is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. It serves as a start storage means for storing a predetermined number as a start memory up to an upper limit. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. It is stored, and various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A147) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 33, first, a low probability determination flag is prepared in order to perform a determination based on the determination value in the low probability state (step A151), and a look-ahead jackpot determination process is performed (step A152).
Then, when the result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A153; Y), a jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A154), and the jackpot symbol prepared in step A142 is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A155), and the process proceeds to step A157.
If the result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is not a jackpot (step A153; N), that is, if it is a miss, the stop symbol information for the miss is set (step A156), and the process proceeds to step A157.

Then, the stop symbol information is saved in the symbol information area (step A157), the target start port switch and the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the stop symbol information are prepared (step A158), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A159). As a result, the determination result in the low probability state is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, a high-probability determination flag is prepared in order to perform a determination based on the determination value in the high-probability state (step A160), and a look-ahead jackpot determination process is performed (step A161).
Then, when the result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A162; Y), a jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A163), and the jackpot symbol prepared in step A142 is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A166.
If the result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is not a jackpot (step A162; N), that is, if it is a miss, the stop symbol information for the miss is set (step A165), and the process proceeds to step A166.

Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (step A166), and if the special figure is not in the high probability (step A166; N), the process proceeds to step A168.
If the special symbol has a high probability (step A166; Y), the stopped symbol information is saved (overwritten) in the symbol information area (step A167), and the process proceeds to step A168.
After that, a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A169). As a result, the determination result in the high probability state is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the special figure information setting process (step A170) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step). A171). After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A172), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A173), the special figure reservation information determination process is completed. The special figure information setting process in step A170 and the variation pattern setting process in step A171 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, the pre-reading stop symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are obtained. It is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the look-ahead stop symbol command, a command corresponding to each of the judgment result in the low probability state and the judgment result in the high probability state is transmitted. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the decorative special figure start memory display unit 42 of the center case 40, from the start timing of the special figure variation display game It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information in advance.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment such as) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. Good.

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
Next, the details of the look-ahead jackpot determination process (steps A152, A161) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the look-ahead jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A181), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A182). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A182; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A187), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process ends.
When the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A182; N), it is determined whether the determination flag is a high probability determination (step A183).

Then, when the determination flag is a high probability determination (step A183; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step A184), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value. (Step A186).
If the determination flag is not a high probability determination (step A183; N), that is, if it is a low probability determination flag, an upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A185), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step A186).

When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A186; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A187), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process ends. If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A186; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A188), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is completed.

[Upper prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the upper prize opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, in the upper prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the processing is in progress while the big winning opening is open (step A191). ). If the process during the opening of the large winning opening is in progress (step A191; Y), the process proceeds to step A193. Further, when the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is not in progress (step A191; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether the remaining ball of the large winning opening is being processed (step A192).

If the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is in progress (step A192; Y), the process proceeds to step A193. If the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening is not in progress (step A192; N), the processing of monitoring the upper winning opening switch is terminated. Since the special figure game processing number does not shift to the next until the special figure game processing timer reaches "0", the progress state of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number in this way.

Then, it is determined whether or not the upper prize opening is in operation (step A193). The operation of the upper prize opening is a state in which the second special variable prize device 39 may detect a prize. The possibility of detecting a winning includes not only the state in which the opening / closing door 39c is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning can be won, but also the predetermined period after the conversion from the open state to the closed state. .. If the upper prize opening is not in operation (step A193; N), the upper prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the upper prize opening is in operation (step A193; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize opening switch 39a (step A194).

If there is no input to the upper prize opening switch (step A194; N), the upper prize winning opening switch monitoring process ends. When there is an input to the upper prize opening switch (step A194; Y), the grand prize opening count command is prepared (step A195), and the effect command setting process (step A196) is performed. As a result, the effect control device 300 can execute the effect according to the winning of the second special variable winning device 39.
Then, it is determined whether or not the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is in progress (step A197), and if the processing is not in progress during the opening of the large winning opening (step A197; N), the upper large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the processing is in progress while the large winning opening is open (step A197; Y), the large winning opening count number is updated by +1 (step A198), and the large winning opening count number is the upper limit value (winning is possible in one round). It is determined whether the number of game balls is equal to or greater than, for example, “9”) (step A199).

If the number of winning openings is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A199; N), the upper winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
When the number of large winning opening counts exceeds the upper limit value (step A199; Y), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A200), and the upper special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the second special variable winning device 39 is closed and one round ends.

[Lower prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the lower prize opening switch monitoring process (step A3) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in the lower prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the processing is in progress while the big winning opening is open (step A201). ). If the process is in progress while the large winning opening is open (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A203. Further, when the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is not in progress (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether the remaining ball of the large winning opening is being processed (step). A202).

If the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is in progress (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A203. If the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening is not in progress (step A202; N), the lower large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Since the special figure game processing number does not shift to the next until the special figure game processing timer reaches "0", the progress state of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number in this way.

Then, it is determined whether or not the lower prize opening is in operation (step A203). The operation of the lower large winning opening is a state in which the first special variable winning device 38 may detect a winning. The possibility of detecting a prize includes not only a state in which the opening / closing door 38c is activated and the game ball is in an open state in which a prize can be won, but also a predetermined period after the open state is converted to the closed state. .. If the lower prize opening is not in operation (step A203; N), the lower prize opening switch monitoring process ends. Further, when the lower prize opening is in operation (step A203; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower prize opening switch 38a (step A204).

If there is no input to the lower prize opening switch (step A204; N), the lower grand prize opening switch monitoring process ends. When there is an input to the lower prize opening switch (step A204; Y), the grand prize opening count command is prepared (step A205), and the effect command setting process (step A206) is performed. As a result, the effect control device 300 can execute the effect according to the winning of the first special variable winning device 38.
Then, it is determined whether or not the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is in progress (step A207), and if the processing is not in progress during the opening of the large winning opening (step A207; N), the lower large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the processing is in progress while the large winning opening is open (step A207; Y), the large winning opening count number is updated by +1 (step A208), and the large winning opening count number is the upper limit value (winning is possible in one round). It is determined whether the number of game balls is equal to or greater than, for example, “9”) (step A209).

If the number of winning openings is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A209; N), the lower winning opening switch monitoring process ends.
Further, when the number of large winning opening counts exceeds the upper limit value (step A209; Y), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A210), and the hit end pointer value from the special figure hit end pointer area is reached. Is loaded and saved in the control pointer area during special drawing (step A211), and the lower prize winning opening switch monitoring process is completed. As a result, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and one round ends.

[Probability change operating area switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the probability variation operation area switch monitoring process (step A4) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, in the probabilistic operation area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probabilistic operation area 38h is effective (step A221). The probabilistic operating region 38h is in effect when the detection of the game ball by the probabilistic operating region switch 38d is treated as valid (see FIG. 8). When the probability change operation area 38h is not valid (step A221; N), the probability change operation area switch monitoring process ends. Further, when the probability variation operation region 38h is in effect (step A221; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the probability variation operation region switch (step A222).

Then, when there is no input to the probability change operation area switch (step A222; N), the probability change operation area switch monitoring process ends.
When there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch (step A222; Y), the probability variation operation area passage command is prepared (step A223), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A224). As a result, the effect control device 300 can execute the effect corresponding to the inflow of the game ball into the probability variation operation region 38h.

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol is a V-easy symbol (step A225). The V-easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, and 4R probability variation. In the case of a big hit with these symbols, the lower V is opened, so that the game ball will almost certainly flow into the probability variation operation region 38h. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit by 5R normal or 4R normal, which is not a V easy symbol, the lower short is opened, so that the game ball rarely flows into the probability variation operation region 38h.

When the jackpot symbol is a V-easy symbol (step A225; Y), the probability variation operation area normal passage information is set (step A226), and the set information is saved in the probability variation operation area passage information area (step A228). ), The probability change operation area switch monitoring process is terminated.
If the jackpot symbol is not a V-easy symbol (step A225; N), the probability variation operation area irregular passage information is set (step A227), and the set information is saved in the probability variation operation area passage information area (step A229). ), The probability change operation area switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Remaining ball processing timer update processing]
Next, the details of the remaining ball processing timer update processing (step A5) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, in the remaining ball processing timer update processing, first, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing timer that manages the remaining ball processing time of the second special variable winning device 39, which is the remaining ball processing time Is 0 (step A231).

Then, when the upper prize opening remaining ball processing timer is 0 (step A231; Y), that is, when it is not during the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time which is the remaining ball processing time for the second special variable winning device 39. Goes to step A235.
Further, when the upper prize opening remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A231; N), that is, when the upper winning opening remaining ball processing time is in progress, the upper winning opening remaining ball processing timer is updated by -1 (step A231; N). Step A232), it is determined whether or not the timer for processing the remaining balls of the upper prize opening has become 0 (step A233).

If the timer for processing the remaining balls in the upper prize opening is not 0 (step A233; N), the process proceeds to step A235.
Further, when the timer for processing the remaining balls of the upper prize opening becomes 0 (step A233; Y), the setting at the end of the processing time of the remaining balls of the upper prize opening is performed (step A234). In the setting at the end of the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to off, the upper prize opening open state flag is cleared, and the flag is saved during the upper prize entrance fraud monitoring period. To do.

Next, it is determined whether the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing timer that manages the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing time, which is the remaining ball processing time of the first special variable winning device 38, is 0 (step A235).
Then, when the lower prize opening remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A235; N), that is, when the lower prize opening remaining ball processing time is in progress, the lower prize opening remaining ball processing timer is updated by -1. (Step A236), it is determined whether or not the lower prize opening remaining ball processing timer has become 0 (step A237).

If the lower winning opening remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A237; N), the remaining ball processing timer update process is terminated.
Further, when the lower prize opening remaining ball processing timer becomes 0 (step A237; Y), the setting at the end of the lower prize winning opening remaining ball processing time is performed (step A238). In the setting at the end of the remaining ball processing time of the lower prize opening, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to off, the lower prize opening open state flag is cleared, and the flag is saved during the lower prize opening fraud monitoring period. To do.

After that, it is determined whether the lever solenoid is stopped (step A239), and if the lever solenoid is stopped (step A239; Y), the remaining ball processing timer update process is terminated. The state in which the lever solenoid is stopped is a state set when the first special variable winning device 38 is opened except in the first round, that is, when the lever solenoid 38f is left in the OFF state. In this case, since the lever solenoid 38f does not operate after the remaining ball processing time has elapsed, the processing related to the operation of the lever solenoid 38f after the subsequent remaining ball processing time has elapsed is not performed.

When the lever solenoid is not stopped (step A239; N), the information during the remaining ball monitoring operation is saved in the lever solenoid information area (step A240), and it is determined whether the number of remaining balls is 0 (step A242). ).
Then, when the number of remaining spheres is not 0 (step A242; N), the remaining sphere processing timer update process is terminated. In this case, the remaining ball monitoring operation of the lever solenoid is maintained.

When the number of remaining balls is 0 (step A242; Y), the lever solenoid is set at the end of monitoring the remaining balls (step A243), and the remaining ball processing timer update process is completed. In the setting of the lever solenoid at the end of the remaining ball monitoring, the stopped information is saved in the lever solenoid information area, and the stopped value is saved in the control pointer in the lever solenoid control area. Also, the control timer area of the lever solenoid control area is cleared to 0.

On the other hand, when the lower winning opening remaining ball processing timer is 0 (step A235; Y), that is, when the remaining ball processing time of the lower winning opening has already expired, the lever solenoid is operating the remaining ball monitoring operation. (Step A241).
Then, when the lever solenoid is not in the remaining ball monitoring operation (step A241; N), the remaining ball processing timer update process is terminated.
Further, when the lever solenoid is in the remaining ball monitoring operation (step A241; Y), the process proceeds to step A242. In this case, when the number of remaining balls becomes 0 (step A242; Y), the lever solenoid is set at the end of monitoring the remaining balls (step A243), and the operation of the lever solenoid 38f ends.

By the above processing, the processing time of the remaining balls in the upper winning opening and the processing time of the remaining balls in the lower winning opening are managed. The timer that manages the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening and the remaining ball processing time of the lower winning opening is a timer different from the special figure game processing timer in order to manage at least the opening time of the special variable winning device in the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to manage the processing time of the remaining balls in the upper prize opening and the processing time of the remaining balls in the lower prize opening in parallel with the progress of the special game state. That is, while managing the opening of one special variable winning device, it is possible to manage the processing time of the remaining balls in the large winning opening of the other special variable winning device.

When trying to control the interval time and the remaining ball processing time of the large winning opening that follows with one special figure game processing timer, the special figure game processing timer manages the interval time after managing the openable time in the round. After that, the remaining ball processing time of the big winning opening is managed, and the open time of the next round is managed, so that the time between rounds becomes long. If you try to shorten the time between rounds, the processing time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening will also be shortened, so it is easy for the regular winning to be treated as invalid. On the contrary, if the processing time of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is lengthened in order to prevent such a situation, there is a problem that the time between rounds becomes long and the digestion speed in the special game state is sacrificed.

In addition, since the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are opened alternately, a sufficiently long upper winning opening remaining ball processing time and lower winning opening remaining ball processing time are always secured. It becomes possible to do. Then, after the end of the remaining ball processing time of the large winning opening, the fraud monitoring period is set until the special variable winning device that was the processing target of the remaining ball processing time of the large winning opening is opened. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of damage even if there is an act of illegally winning a game ball against a special variable winning device that remains closed after the end of the ball processing time.

From the above, the game is controlled in the game machine that executes the variable display game based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. The game control means (game control device 100), the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won in the special game state. A device 39 is provided, and the game control means opens either the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 in each round in a special gaming state composed of a plurality of rounds. By changing the special variable winning device to be opened in each round, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are controlled to be opened alternately in each round, and the opening in the round is completed. Based on the above, the detection of the game ball that has flowed into the special variable winning device opened in the round is controlled to start the large winning opening remaining ball processing time that treats it as a normal winning, and the large winning opening remaining ball processing time is at least. The time is measured by a timer different from the timer (special figure game processing timer) for managing the opening time of the special variable winning device in the special game state.

Therefore, since the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are alternately opened, it is possible to secure the large winning opening remaining ball processing time for the closed special variable winning device and the large winning opening remaining ball. Since the processing time and the opening time of the special variable winning device are managed independently, it is possible to appropriately manage the remaining ball processing time of the large winning opening for the other special variable winning device while the other special variable winning device is open, and it is closed. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the special variable winning device inside.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) is said to be in the period from the end of the large winning opening remaining ball processing time to the opening of the special variable winning device targeted by the large winning opening remaining ball processing time. This means that the winning of the special variable winning device is invalidated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent cheating during the special gaming state.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A11) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) and the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) are both “0”. (Step A301). If neither the special figure 1 hold number nor the special figure 2 hold number is "0" (step A301; N), that is, if at least one of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number is not 0, the variation order flag. A flag is loaded from the storage area (for a total of 1 hold) (step A302), and it is determined whether or not the variation is in the special figure 1 (step A303).

Then, when the variation of the special figure 1 (step A303; Y), that is, when the information of the special figure 1 is stored in the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total number of hold 1), the special figure 1 hold number is set. The corresponding decorative special figure hold number command is prepared (step A304), and the effect command setting process (step A305) is performed. At this point, the number of special figure 1 hold is not subtracted, so the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the current value of special figure 1 hold number -1 is prepared. Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is not the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is stored in the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total number of holdings 1), it corresponds to the number of holdings of the special figure 2. The decoration special figure hold number command to be performed is prepared (step A307), and the effect command setting process (step A308) is performed. Since the special figure 2 hold number is not subtracted at this point, the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the current value of the special figure 2 hold number -1 is prepared. Then, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended.

When both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step A310), and the customer waiting demo is performed. If it has already been started (step A310; Y), the process proceeds to step A314. If the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A310; N), the customer waiting demo flag area is set to the customer waiting demo flag area (step A311). Subsequently, the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A312), and the effect command setting process (step A313) is performed.

Next, "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A314), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A315), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315). Step A316). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A318). Figure Ends normal processing.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A306) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 40, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321). Next, a game count command corresponding to the value of the game count area that manages the execution count of the special figure variation display game for changing the effect mode is prepared (step A322), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A323).

After that, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A324) for setting the jackpot flag 1 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a jackpot is performed. Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A325) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A326) is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A327). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A328) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A329) is performed.

Next, "1" is set as the processing number (step A330), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A331). Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A332), and the signal related to the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A333). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A334), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. Here, 100 ms) is set (step A335), an initial value (here, 0) is set in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A336), and the special figure 1 variation start process is completed.

The initial value set in the special figure 1 variable symbol number area is 0, so that the variable display is started from the state in which all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variation display has started by starting the variation display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A309) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is done as.

As shown in FIG. 41, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341). Next, a game count command corresponding to the value of the game count area that manages the execution count of the special figure variation display game for changing the effect mode is prepared (step A342), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A343). After that, the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A343) for setting the jackpot flag 2 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A345) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A346) is performed, and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A347). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A348) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A349) is performed.

Next, "1" is set as the processing number (step A350), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A351). Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A352), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 2 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A353). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A354), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. Here, 100 ms) is set (step A355), an initial value (here, 0) is set in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A356), and the special figure 2 variation start process is completed.

The initial value set in the special figure 2 variable symbol number area is 0, so that the variable display is started from the state in which all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variation display has started by starting the variation display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A324) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step A361). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (step A362), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (Step A363). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the earliest special figure 1 start memory in the special figure 1 in the digestion order. After that, a jackpot determination process (step A364) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed according to whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A364) is a jackpot (step A365; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A361 (step A366). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A364) is not a jackpot (step A365; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated while saving the information about the jackpot flag 1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 43 shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A344) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A371). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (Step A373). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the earliest special figure 2 start memory in the special figure 2 in the digestion order. After that, a jackpot determination process (step A374) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed according to whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is a jackpot (step A375; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A371 (step A376). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is not a jackpot (step A375; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information that the jackpot flag 2 is out of alignment. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 44 shows the jackpot determination process (steps A364 and A374) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A387), and the jackpot determination process ends.
When the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step A383). Then, in the case of the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ). If the probability is not high (step A383; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ..

When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A357), and the jackpot determination process ends. If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A388), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A325) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A405), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41.
Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A407). As the number of rounds upper limit value information area, either 12R, 5R or 4R is set.
Then, the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step A408), and the process proceeds to step A411. The large winning opening opening information is information that defines an opening pattern (see FIG. 7) in a special gaming state.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A401; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A409), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then (step A410), the process proceeds to step A411. By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A411), the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A412), and the effect command setting process (step A413) is performed. This decorative special drawing command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300.
Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A414), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step A415), and the special figure 1 Stop The symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A345) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step A433), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 2 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41.
Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437). As the number of rounds upper limit value information area, either 12R, 5R or 4R is set.
Then, the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step A438), and the process proceeds to step A441. The large winning opening opening information is information that defines an opening pattern (see FIG. 7) in a special gaming state.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A439), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then (step A440), the process proceeds to step A441. By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A441). The decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A442), and the effect command setting process (step A443) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A444), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step A445), and the special figure 2 Stop The symbol setting process is terminated.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36), and the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning opening). It serves as a variable display game execution means for executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball in the device 37). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (steps A170, A326, A346) in the special figure reservation information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the special figure information setting process, first, the variable group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the variable group selection pointer corresponding to the probability state and the stop symbol pattern number is acquired (step A452). .. The probability state is one of three states: a low probability state and not a time saving state, a high probability state and a time saving state, and a low probability state and a time saving state. The stop symbol pattern number is any of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the outlier symbol, the 12R probability variation symbol, the 5R probability variation symbol, the 5R normal symbol, the 4R probability variation symbol, and the 4R normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol (step A453), and if it is not an outlier symbol (step A453; N), that is, if it is a jackpot symbol, the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A453). Step A455), the special figure information setting process is completed.
Further, in the case of an outlier symbol (step A453; Y), the variable group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the total value of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number (step A453), and the variable group selection pointer is updated. The pointer is saved in the area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process is completed.
That is, when the result is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected without considering the start memory number, and when the result is out of order, the fluctuation pattern is selected in consideration of the start memory number. In step A454, the variable group selection pointer is updated in consideration of whether the processing target is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 and the current effect mode.

For example, when the effect mode is the normal mode and the processing target is the special figure 1, the variable group is selected in consideration of whether the total number of pending numbers is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 to 8. Update the pointer. Further, when the effect mode is the normal mode and the processing target is the special figure 2, the variable group selection pointer is updated without considering the total number of pending numbers.
Then, when the effect mode is other than the normal mode and the processing target is the special figure 1, the variable group selection pointer is updated without considering the total number of pending numbers, and when the effect mode is other than the normal mode. When the processing target is the special figure 2, the variable group selection pointer is updated in consideration of whether the total number of pending numbers is 0 to 1 or 2 to 8.
Note that the total number of holds is 0 when the start memory is generated and the special figure fluctuation display game is started in a state where there is no start memory (during the customer waiting demonstration), and the total number of holds is 1. Is a case where the special figure variation display game is started with one start memory.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process, special figure 1 variation start process, and variation pattern setting process (steps A171, A328, A348) at the special figure 2 variation start will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group selection address table is set (step A461), the address of the variation group table corresponding to the variation group selection pointer is acquired, and the address is prepared (step A462). , The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step A463).

Then, a 2-byte distribution process (step A464) is performed to acquire and prepare the address of the variation pattern selection table obtained as a result of the distribution (step A465), and the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (number of pending numbers) is obtained. Load the variable pattern random number 2 from (for 1) and prepare it (step A466). Then, the distribution process (step A467) is performed, the variation pattern number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, saved in the variation pattern number area, and the variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

[2-byte distribution processing]
FIG. 49 shows a 2-byte distribution process (step A464) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the variation pattern selection table of the special figure variation display game from the variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the first data of the selection table (variable group table prepared in step A462) is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step A471). Here, the variation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern selection table, but the variation group table that defines only the variation pattern selection table in which the variation pattern is “no reach”. (For example, in some variable group tables when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the first data of the selection table (variable group table) is a code without distribution (step A472; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A477), and 2-byte distribution is performed. End the process.
On the other hand, when the head data of the selection table (variable group table) is not a code without distribution (step A472; N), one distribution value first specified in the selection table (variable group table) is acquired (step A472; N). Step A473).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A473 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A463 (step A474), and the calculated new random number is generated. It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than "0" (step A475).
Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A475; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A476), the process proceeds to step A473, and thereafter. Perform processing. That is, by acquiring the distribution value specified next in the selection table (variable group table) (step A473) and then subtracting the distribution value from the random number value determined in the previous step A475, a new disorder is created. A numerical value is calculated (step A474), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A475).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A475 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A475; Y). As a result, any one of the fluctuation pattern selection tables is selected from at least one fluctuation pattern selection table defined in the selection table (variation group table).
Then, in step A475, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A475; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A477), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. To finish.

The distribution process of step A467 in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting process is the same process as the above-mentioned 2-byte distribution process. However, the program instructions for calculating are different in that the size of the random number used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes.

[Fluctuation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps A329, A349) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 are cleared (step A491).
Next, the fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number is acquired, and saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A493). After that, the variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared (step A494), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A495).

Next, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step A496), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is set (step A497). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A498), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step A499). Then, the variation order flag storage area is shifted (step A500), the free area after the shift is cleared (step A501), and the variation start information setting process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. Variable commands including information about the pattern are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A12) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the special figure change processing, first, as information for stopping the change display, a symbol stop command corresponding to the change symbol determination flag is prepared (step A601), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A601). A602).
Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, the display time is set to 800 msec, and when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 2000 msec. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

After that, the process number "2" related to the process during display of the special figure is set (step A605), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A606).
Next, the signal related to the end of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal related to the end of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, special symbol) is saved. 2 (OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the number of symbol confirmations related to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal is set in the signal control timer area. Save the value (eg 256 ms) (step A609).

After that, as the information for controlling the first special figure fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step). A610) As information for controlling the second special figure fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. (Step A611), the process of displaying the special figure is terminated.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A13) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 52, in the special figure display processing, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process. The jackpot flag 2 set in step 2 is loaded (step A701), and the jackpot flag 1 region and the jackpot flag 2 region of the RWM are cleared (step A702).
Then, when it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A703) and it is determined to be a jackpot (step A703; Y), the jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) of the second special figure variation display game is started. (For example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A706). The round number upper limit table is set (step A707).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A703 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A703; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A704), and the jackpot is a jackpot (step A704). When it is determined that A704; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on and the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game is turned on. The special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A705), and the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A707) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A707), the round number upper limit value (either 12, 5 or 4 in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired. Save in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A708). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A709).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A710), and the effect command setting process (step A711) is performed.
After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (Step A713) is performed.
Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process (step). A715) is performed.

Next, the large winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). After that, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A717). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the jackpot fanfare time (here, either 100 ms, 2500 ms, or 500 ms) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A718), and the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting process 1 (step A719) is saved. ) Is performed, and the processing during display of the special figure is terminated. That is, based on the result of the game control device 100 being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning. It serves as a special game state generating means for generating a special game state that converts the device 39 into an open state.

On the other hand, in step A704, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A704; N), the time reduction variation number update process (step A720) for managing the period of the high probability state or the time saving state is performed, and the effect mode is set. The special figure game information check process (step A721) regarding the above is performed. Next, "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A722), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A723), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A723). Step A724) The process of displaying the special figure is terminated.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the time reduction fluctuation number update process (step A720) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, in the time reduction fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure time reduction is in progress (time reduction state) (step A751). If the special time is not shortened (step A751; N), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure time is shortened (step A751; Y), it is determined whether the special figure is in the high probability (in the high probability state) (step A752). If the special figure is not in high probability (step A752; N), the process proceeds to step A757. Further, when the special figure has a high probability (step A752; Y), the number of high-probability fluctuations is updated by -1 (step A753), and it is determined whether the number of high-probability fluctuations has become "0" (step A754). ).

If the number of high probability fluctuations is not "0" (step A754; N), the process proceeds to step A757. Further, when the number of high-probability fluctuations becomes "0" (step A754; Y), that is, when the high-probability state ends in the special figure fluctuation display game this time, the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step). A755), the probability variation operation area passage information area is cleared (step A756), and the process proceeds to step A757. The information in the probability variation operation region passage information region is cleared by this processing or by turning on the power of the gaming machine.

Next, the number of time reduction fluctuations is updated by -1 (step A757), and it is determined whether or not the number of time reduction fluctuations has become "0" (step A758). If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A758; N), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated. Further, when the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step A758; Y), that is, when the time reduction state ends in the special figure variation display game this time, the signal related to the time reduction end (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off). ) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A759).

Next, the signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). In the game machine of the present embodiment, both the high-probability state and the time-saving state are terminated by executing the special figure variation display game the same number of times, so that when the high-probability variation number becomes 0, the game is terminated. The number of time reduction fluctuations is also 0, and the high probability state and the time reduction state are terminated at the same time. In step A760, for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol is turned off. 1 Set the high probability state signal to OFF. Even when the special figure is in the high probability state, only the probability state changes in the normal figure, so that the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Next, the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A761), the normal figure low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A762), and the special figure is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Save the low probability & no time saving flag (step A763). Further, the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A764), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the second game state display unit 77) is turned on. In order to turn off the lights, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A765), and the time reduction variation number update process is completed.

[Special figure game information check processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game information check process (step A721) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the special figure game information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771).
If the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771; Y), the special figure game information check process ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed.

If the next mode transition information is not a non-update code (step A771; N), the number of games that can be executed in the special figure variation display game until the effect mode is changed is updated by -1 (step A772), and the game is played. It is determined whether the number of times is "0" (step A773). If the number of games is not "0" (step A773; N), the special figure game information check process is terminated. Further, when the number of games is "0" (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774), and then Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information (step A775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the number of games of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the game is saved in the game number area in the RWM. (Step A778), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A779).
After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A780), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A781), and the effect command setting process (step A781) is performed. Step A782) is performed.

Next, a game count command corresponding to the newly set number of games is prepared (step A783), the effect command setting process (step A784) is performed, and the special figure game information check process is completed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified number of rotations for switching the effect mode. By managing the effect mode with the game control device 100 in this way, it is possible to control, for example, to generate a specific reach only in a specific effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 1 (step A719) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A791), and the processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A792).

Next, signals related to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 The variation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A793). Even when the special figure is in the high probability state, only the probability state changes in the normal figure, so that the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.
After that, clear the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state (step A794), save the number without time reduction in the game state display number area (step A795), and set the normal game mode flag. Save the low probability flag in the area (step A796).

Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A797), and the high probability notification flag is turned off in order to turn off the game state display LED (third game state display unit 78) provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. Clear the area (step A798) and save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A799).

Next, the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the high probability state is cleared to 0 (step A800), and the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time saving state is managed. The time reduction fluctuation frequency region is cleared to 0 (step A801). Then, the normal mode number is saved in the effect mode number area (step A802), the game count area is cleared to 0 (step A803), and the non-updated code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A804). After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A805). As a result, the high-probability state and the time-saving state are terminated, and the normal-probability state and the normal state are set. In addition, the information on the effect mode is temporarily cleared when the special game state occurs.

Then, the signal related to the right-handed strike instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the second game state display unit 77) is turned on. In order to turn on the light, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A14) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, it is determined whether or not the odd-numbered round, which is the round for opening the first special variable winning device 38, is started (step A851), and the case is not the start of the odd-numbered round. (Step A851; N), that is, in the case of an even-numbered round in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, the process proceeds to step A853. Further, in the case of starting an odd number round (step A851; Y), it is determined whether the remaining ball counter that manages the number of game balls remaining in the upper flow path 38j of the first special variation winning device 38 is 0 (step A851; Y). Step A852).

If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A852; N), the fanfare / interval processing ends. That is, if the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the game ball remains in the upper flow path 38j, the remaining ball may flow into the probability variation operation region 38h. In particular, immediately after the opening of the first special variable winning device 38, the game ball easily flows into the probability variation operating region 38h, so that there is a high possibility that a high probability state will occur. Therefore, when there is a remaining ball in the upper flow path 38j, that is, when there is a game ball which may flow into the probability variation operation region 38h forming a specific region in the first special variation winning device 38, the probability variation The start of the round for opening the first special variable winning device 38 is waited until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the operating region 38h. In the case of an even-numbered round in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, the round is started regardless of the presence or absence of a game ball in the second special variable winning device 39.

When the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A852; Y), the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step A853), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step). A854), the effect command setting process (step A855) is performed.
After that, the large winning opening opening table is set (step A856), and the large winning opening opening information and the large winning opening opening data corresponding to the number of rounds are acquired and saved (step A857). The large winning opening opening data is data indicating which of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, and the opening mode such as the opening time.

Then, it is determined whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the running special gaming state with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value region of the RWM (step A858), and the final round. If (step A858; Y), the process proceeds to step A863. If it is not the final round (step A858; N), it is determined whether it is the lever solenoid operation round (step A859). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member 38i, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is only the first specific round.

In the case of the lever solenoid operation round (step A859; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step A860), and the process proceeds to step A863. As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared.

If it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step A859; N), it is determined whether the odd round has started (step A861), and if it is not the start of the odd round (step A861; N), the process proceeds to step A863. .. In this case, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. If it is the start of an odd number of rounds (step A861; Y), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step A862), and the process proceeds to step A863. In this case, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the lever solenoid 38f does not operate.

After that, the large winning opening opening time corresponding to the large winning opening opening data is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A863), and the hit start pointer value corresponding to the large winning opening opening data is acquired and the special figure is hit. Save to the control pointer area (step A864). Further, the hit end pointer value corresponding to the large winning opening opening data is acquired and saved in the special figure hit end pointer area (step A864), and it is determined whether or not the odd number round has started (step A865).

If it is not the start of the odd round (step A865; N), the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the large winning opening is performed (step A868), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated. If the odd-numbered round is started (step A865; Y), the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the large winning opening is performed (step A868), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated.

In step A852, it is confirmed whether the remaining ball counter is 0, but in addition to this, it is confirmed whether the discharge ball counter is 0, and if it is not 0, the processing after step A853 is not performed. You can do it. That is, the round may be started after it is confirmed that all the game balls in the first special variable winning device 38 have been discharged.

From the above, the game is controlled in the game machine that executes the variable display game based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. A specific area (game control device 100) that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won in the special game state, and the game ball can flow into the inside (game control device 100). A first special variable winning device 38 having a probability variation operating area 38h), a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won in a special game state, and an open state in which a game ball can be won, and which does not have a specific area. The game control means is provided with the two special variable winning devices 39, and the game control means is based on the fact that the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 flow into the specific area, as compared with the case where the game balls do not flow into the specific area. It is possible to generate a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the special gaming state, and in a special gaming state composed of a plurality of rounds, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 38 in each round. By opening either one of 39 and changing the special variable winning device to be opened every round, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are opened alternately every round. When starting a round to control and open the first special variable winning device 38, it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into a specific area in the first special variable winning device 38. It means that the start of the round is waited until.

Therefore, since the start of the round for opening the first special variable winning device 38 is waited until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the specific area, the fairness of the game can be ensured. ..

Further, when the game control means (game control device 100) starts a round for opening the second special variable winning device 39, is all the game balls that have flowed into the second special variable winning device 39 discharged? Regardless of whether or not the round is started. Therefore, when the second special variable winning device 39 not provided with the specific area is opened, it is opened without confirmation of discharge, so that the special gaming state can be quickly digested.

Further, in step A851, it may be determined whether or not the specific round has started, and it may be confirmed whether or not the remaining ball counter is 0 only when the specific round is started. That is, a game control means for controlling a game in a game machine that executes a variable display game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. (Game control device 100) can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won in the special game state and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and a specific area (probability variation operation area) in which the game ball can flow into the inside. The first special variation winning device 38 provided with 38h), and the second special variation which can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won in the special game state and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and does not have a specific area. The game control means includes the winning device 39, and the game control means is based on the fact that the game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 flows into the specific area, and the game player is more than the case where the game ball does not flow into the specific area. A game state that is advantageous to the player can be generated after the end of the special game state, and in a special game state composed of a plurality of rounds, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are used in each round. By opening either one and changing the special variable winning device to be opened for each round, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are controlled to be opened alternately for each round. , In the special game state, the first special variable winning device 38 is controlled to be executed a plurality of times, and the first of the plurality of rounds in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened is executed. It is configured to determine whether the game ball that has flowed into the special variable winning device 38 has flowed into the specific area, and when starting a specific round, it is possible to flow into the specific area in the first special variable winning device 38. You may wait for the start of the specific round until it is confirmed that there is no sex ball. By doing so, the start of the specific round is waited until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the specific area, so that the fairness of the game can be ensured.

Further, in step A851, it is determined whether it is the start of a specific round or the round for opening the first special variable winning device 38 next to the specific round, and whether the remaining ball counter is 0 only when these rounds are started. You may try to confirm. That is, when the game control means (game control device 100) starts a round for opening the first special variable winning device 38 after the specific round, the game control means (probability variation operation) in the first special variable winning device 38. The start of the round may be waited until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the area 38h). In this way, since it is waited until it is determined whether or not the game ball that has flowed into the specific area has flowed into the specific area, the fairness of the game can be ensured.

Further, although the start of the round is waited when the remaining ball counter is not 0, the start of the special game state may be waited when the remaining ball counter is not 0. That is, the game control means (game control device 100) does not have a game ball that may flow into a specific area in the first special variable winning device 38 when the result of the variable display game is a special result. You may wait for the start of the special game state until it is confirmed. Therefore, the first special variable winning device 38 is not opened until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the specific area, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

Further, when it is determined that the remaining ball counter is not 0 at the start of the round for opening the first special variable winning device 38 other than the specific round, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened in the round. Is also good. Further, if the specific round is a round other than the first round and the remaining ball counter is not 0 at the start of the round in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (may be only at the start of the specific round), the round A plurality of consecutive rounds immediately before the specific round may be a round in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened so as to wait for the start. By doing so, a sufficient time can be secured before the start of the specific round, and the remaining balls can be surely discharged. Further, a plurality of consecutive rounds immediately after the specific round may be a round in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening Transition setting process 1]
FIG. 57 shows the process transition setting process 1 (step A868) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the processing number is set to "4" related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening (step A871), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A872).
After that, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A873), and the signal regarding the start of opening of the upper special winning opening (for example, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is turned on. ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A874).

Then, the upper prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A875), and the information during the operation of the upper winning opening is saved in the upper winning opening state flag area (step A876).
Next, clear the area of the number of fraudulent winnings of the upper prize opening to 0 (step A877), save the flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area of the upper winning opening (step A878), and the remaining ball of the upper winning opening. The processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A879), and the processing transition setting processing 1 during the opening of the large winning opening is terminated.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening Transition setting process 2]
FIG. 58 shows the process transition setting process 2 (step A869) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the processing number is set to "4" related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening (step A881), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A882).
After that, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A883), and the signal regarding the start of opening of the lower large winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is turned on. ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A884).

Then, the lower prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A885), and the lower major winning opening operating information is saved in the lower winning opening state flag area (step A886).
Next, clear the area of the number of illegal winnings of the lower prize opening to 0 (step A887), save the flag outside the illegal monitoring period in the illegal monitoring period flag area of the lower winning opening (step A888), and the remaining ball of the lower winning opening. The processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A889), and the processing transition setting processing 2 during the opening of the large winning opening is terminated.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
Next, the details of the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step A15) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the processing during opening of the large winning opening, first, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening data is a pattern of opening and closing (step A901). The opening / closing pattern is an opening pattern that opens / closes during one round, and is a lower V opening (see FIG. 8) in the present embodiment.
When the large winning opening opening data is a pattern of opening and closing (step A901; Y), the control pointer during special drawing is loaded and prepared (step A902), and the loaded value is equal to or greater than the value of the end pointer per special figure. It is determined whether or not there is (step A903).

Then, when the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the value of the end pointer per special figure (step A903; N), that is, when the opening / closing operation is still performed in the currently executing round, the value of the control pointer area per special figure is increased by +1. It is updated (step A904), the jackpot operation transition setting process is performed (step A905), and the process during the opening of the jackpot is completed.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the jackpot operation transition setting process, branching process is performed by the control pointer during hitting the special figure (step A921).
When the value of the control pointer per special figure is 0, the wait time (here, 2700 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A922), and the first special variable winning device 38 is closed. In the big winning opening solenoid output data area, the lower winning opening off data is saved (step A923), and the big hit operation transition setting process is completed.

When the value of the control pointer during hitting the special figure is 1, the jackpot V second half opening time (here, 25000 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A924), and the first special variable winning device 38 is set. The lower winning opening on-data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step A925) in order to open the jackpot operation transition setting process, and the jackpot operation transition setting process is completed.

Returning to FIG. 59, when the large winning opening opening data is not a pattern to open / close (step A901; N), or when the loaded value is equal to or greater than the value of the end pointer per special figure (step A903; Y), it is being executed. It is determined whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the special gaming state with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value region of the RWM (step A906).

If it is not the final round (step A906; N), the large winning opening opening data and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds (here, either 300 ms, 900 ms, or 1300 ms) are saved in the special figure game processing timer area (in this case, either 300 ms, 900 ms, or 1300 ms). Step A907), the interval command is prepared (step A908), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A909). Further, the processing number is set to "3" related to the fanfare / interval processing (step A910), and the process proceeds to step A915.

In the case of the final round (step A906; Y), the remaining ball processing time (here, either 1300 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the large winning opening opening data is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A911). ), The ending command is prepared (step A912), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A913). Further, the processing number is set to "5" related to the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening (step A914), and the process proceeds to step A915.

Then, the large winning opening remaining ball processing time corresponding to the large winning opening opening data and the number of rounds is saved in the large winning opening remaining ball processing timer area (step A915). In this process, when the ending round is a round for opening the first special variable winning device 38, the initial value of the lower winning opening remaining ball processing time is saved in the lower winning opening remaining ball processing timer area. When the ending round is a round for opening the second special variable winning device 39, the initial value of the upper winning opening remaining ball processing time is saved in the upper winning opening remaining ball processing timer area.

After that, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A916), and the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 or the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39 is closed. The off data for turning off the winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A917), and the processing during opening of the winning opening is completed. In step A916, the off-data of the lower winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper winning opening solenoid 39b are set, but only the off-data of the large winning opening solenoid of the special variable winning device that is open is set. You may do so.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the winning opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A16) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 61, in the large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter that manages the number of game balls remaining in the upper flow path 38j of the first special variable winning device 38 is 0 ( In step A951), if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A951; N), the large winning opening remaining ball processing is terminated. That is, until all the game balls in the upper flow path 38j of the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged, the process does not shift from the large winning opening remaining ball processing, and the special game state is not terminated.

When the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A951; Y), "6" is set as the processing number related to the jackpot end processing (step A952), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A952). Step A953). After that, the ending time (here, either 100 ms, 2300 ms, or 2700 ms) corresponding to the large winning opening opening data is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A954).

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A955), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A956). ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit value area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state (step A957). Then, the information in the large winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information of the large winning opening is cleared (step A956), the control pointer area during hitting the special figure is cleared (step A957), and the special figure hits. The end pointer area is cleared (step A958), and the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is completed.

From the above, the game control means (game control device 100) may flow into a specific area (probability variation operation area 38h) in the first special variable winning device 38 when the special game state is terminated. It means that the special game state is not ended until it is confirmed that the ball does not exist. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining until the next special game state, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game. In addition, although it is confirmed in step A951 whether the remaining ball counter is 0, in addition to this, it is confirmed whether the discharge ball counter is 0, and if it is not 0, the processing after step A952 is not performed. You may. That is, the special game state may be terminated after it is confirmed that all the game balls in the first special variable winning device 38 have been discharged.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (step A17) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in this jackpot end process, first, the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1001), and the special game state this time is based on the hit in the high probability & time saving. (Step A1002).
When the special game state this time is not based on the hit in the high probability & time saving (step A1002; N), it is determined whether the jackpot symbol is a V easy symbol (step A1003). The V-easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, and 4R probability variation.

When the jackpot symbol is not a V easy symbol (step A1003; N), the information on the start of the time saving mode B is prepared as the effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1004), and the process proceeds to step A1006.
In addition, when the special game state of this time is based on the hit in the high probability & time saving (step A1002; Y), or when the big hit symbol is the V easy symbol (step A1003; Y), the special game Information on the start of the time saving mode A is prepared as the effect mode after the end of the state (step A1005), and the process proceeds to step A1006.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is the probability variation operation region passage information that is set when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h (step A1006).
When there is no probability variation operation area passage information (step A1006; N), the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step A1007), and the process proceeds to step A1010. In this case, the high probability state does not occur.
If there is information on passing through the probabilistic operating region (step A1006; Y), the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step A1008), and the information prepared as the effect mode after the end of the special game state is stored in the ST mode (ST mode A). Alternatively, it is replaced with B) (step A1009), and the process proceeds to step A1010. In this case, it is a high probability state. That is, when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h regardless of the jackpot symbol, the probability is high.

After that, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1010), and the address of the table corresponding to the prepared information is acquired (step A1011). Then, from this information, the effect mode number of the effect mode after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved (step A1012), and the number of games of the effect mode after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved (step). A1013), the next mode transition information of the effect mode after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved (step A1014). Further, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1015), and the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1016).

Next, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the probabilistic operating region irregularly, which is the inflow of the game ball into the probabilistic operating region 38h in the special gaming state based on the jackpot symbol that is not the V easy symbol (step A1017). Then, if it does not pass through the probabilistic operating region irregularly (step A1017; N), the process proceeds to step A1019. Further, in the case of irregular passage in the probability variation operation region (step A1017; Y), the irregular probability variation information is added to the probability information command (step A1018), and the process proceeds to step A1019. Then, the effect command setting process is performed (step A1019), and the probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands in which the production mode information is included in either "high probability / time saving" or "low probability / time saving", and the probability variation operation area irregularly passes. In the case of, irregular probability change information is added.
Then, the game count command corresponding to the game count is prepared (step A1020), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A1021).

Next, "0" is set as the processing number related to the special figure normal processing (step A1022), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1023).
After that, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, turning off the jackpot 1 signal, turning off the jackpot 3 signal, and turning off the jackpot 4 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1024), and the signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, , The condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 hit signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1025).

Then, the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of jackpot rounds is cleared (step A1026), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area of the upper prize winning opening (step A1027), and the lower size The flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1028). Then, the information in the probability variation operation area passage information area is cleared (step A1029), the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1030), and the jackpot end process is completed.

When the special game state this time is based on the hit of the high probability state or the time saving state, the ST mode may be set as the effect mode regardless of the presence or absence of the probability variation operation area passage information. In the game machine of the present embodiment, if a big hit is made in the first special figure variation display game, it becomes a V easy symbol with a predetermined probability, and if it is a big hit in the second special figure variation display game, it is all a V easy symbol. Become. Since the game progresses by hitting right during the high probability state and the time saving state, basically only the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed, and all the big hits in the high probability state and the time saving state are V easy symbols. Should be. However, if a big hit is made in the first special figure fluctuation display game based on the first start memory that existed at the time of the big hit, the V easy symbol is not obtained at a predetermined ratio even though it is in a high probability state or a time saving state. Sometimes.

A player who is not familiar with the game content may understand that all jackpots in the high probability state and the time saving state are V easy symbols, and may have a distrust of not being in ST mode. In the case of a big hit in a high probability state or a time saving state, it is possible to prevent such a feeling of distrust by always shifting to the ST mode. In addition, since the ST mode ends without a big hit occurring at a predetermined rate even in a high probability state, even if the ST mode is set in a low probability state, a big hit does not occur in the ST mode, which makes it uncomfortable. Will not occur.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 63 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1007) in the jackpot end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of the time saving (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1041). Since the signal related to the start of the time reduction is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form.
Next, signals related to the start of low probability & time reduction (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is ON, special symbol 2 variation The time reduction state signal is turned ON, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1042).

Next, the number with the time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A1043), the normal figure high probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A1044), and the special figure game mode flag area is special. Figure Save the low probability & time saving flag (step A1045). After that, the high probability fluctuation frequency region is cleared to 0 (step A1046), the initial value (here, 100 times) is saved in the time reduction fluctuation frequency region (step A1047), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 64 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1008) in the jackpot end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the time saving (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1051). Since the signal related to the start of the time reduction is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form.
Next, signals related to the start of high probability & time reduction (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is ON, special symbol 2 variation time The shortened state signal is turned ON, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1052).

Next, the number with the time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A1053), the normal figure high probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A1054), and the special figure game mode flag area is special. Figure Save the high probability & time saving flag (step A1055). After that, the initial value (here, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number region (step A1056), the initial value (here, 100 times) is saved in the time reduction fluctuation frequency region (step A1057), and the jackpot end setting is set. Process 2 ends. In addition, although the game progresses by right-handed during the time saving state, since it is instructed to right-handed from the special game state, the setting related to instructing right-handed is performed in the jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2. Absent.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state (time saving state) for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. Then, in the specific gaming state, the operation of the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled so that the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 becomes easier than in the case of not in the specific gaming state, and the operation of the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled as compared with the case of not in the specific gaming state. It is configured to shorten the fluctuation time of the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure fluctuation display game.
Further, the game control device 100 serves as a high-probability state generating means capable of generating a high-probability state (probability-changing state) for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state.

[Lever solenoid control process]
Next, the details of the lever solenoid control process (step A22) during the special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in the lever solenoid control process, first, it is determined whether the lever solenoid control pointer has a non-update code (here, -1) (step A1101). When the lever solenoid control pointer is a non-update code (step A1101; Y), the lever solenoid control process ends. If the lever solenoid control pointer is not a non-update code (step A1101; N), the lever solenoid control timer is updated by -1 (step A1102), and it is determined whether the lever solenoid control timer has become 0 (step A1103). ..

If the lever solenoid control timer is not 0 (step A1103; N), the lever solenoid control process ends. When the lever solenoid control timer becomes 0 (step A1103; Y), the lever solenoid control table is set (step A1104), and the table address corresponding to the lever solenoid control pointer is calculated (step A1105). Then, the control pointer of the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control point area (step A1107), and the output data of the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid output data area (step A1108). After that, the probability variation operation area validity determination flag is acquired and saved in the probability variation operation area validity determination flag area (step A1109), and the lever solenoid control process is terminated.

By the above processing, the lever solenoid control pointer is sequentially updated every time a predetermined time elapses, ON and OFF of the lever solenoid 38f are set as shown in FIGS. 8C and 8D, and the probability variation operation region is set. Enable / disable of the switch 38d is set. When the operation of the lever solenoid is terminated by satisfying a predetermined condition, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the probability variation operation area switch 38d is invalidated by setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer. Then, after setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer, -1 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the state in which the operation is stopped continues.

[Direction command setting process]
Next, the details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 66, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
When the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2001).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), the command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
When the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2004).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), the command data (ACTION) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process ends. The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as "command setting process".

[Design fluctuation control process]
FIG. 67 shows the symbol variation control process (steps A19 and A21) in the above-mentioned special figure game process and the symbol variation control process (step B15) in the general diagram game process described later. The symbol fluctuation control process is a process of controlling fluctuations of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) and ordinary symbols (ordinary symbols) and setting display data of special symbols and ordinary symbols.

In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag related to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the normal figure) is changing (step A2101). .. In the case of this embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit determination value, and the display table 2 ( The address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) and the address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) are defined.

When the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is changing (step A2102; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2103). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A18, step A20, and step B14.
Next, the blinking control timer to be controlled is updated by -1 (step A2104), it is determined whether the updated blinking control timer is "0" (step A2105), and the updated blinking control timer is "0". If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number region to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is completed.

When the updated blinking control timer is "0" (step A2105; Y), the blinking control timer initial value (here, 100 ms) corresponding to the target blinking control timer area is saved (step A2106). The variable symbol number of the controlled object is updated by +1 within the corresponding range (step A2107), and the display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number region of the controlled object is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area provided in the RAM 111C (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is not changing (step A2102; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2109). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A18, step A20, and step B14. Next, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the control target is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal game processing (step S111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

As shown in FIG. 68, in the Fuzu game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the Fuden winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. The monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or has already been timed up, it is referred to in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. The process of setting the normal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and the process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal figure game process number (step B6) is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the normal figure game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the normal figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and the effect setting of the normal figure change display game, and the normal figure change are in progress. Performs normal processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for processing.
Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B9) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal power opening time is set according to whether or not the time is shortened. In addition, the normal map display processing (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map hitting process is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "3", the normal figure hitting process is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric power remaining ball processing is set. The process (step B11) is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per end processing is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "5", the normal figure per end process (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 74 (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 74 (step B14). Step B15) is performed to end the normal map game process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101).
Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (for example, during a big hit, during a special time reduction (during normal power support)) (step B102). ..

In the case of a right-handed gaming state (step B102; Y), the number of reserved normal figures is acquired and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step B105).
If the game is not in the right-handed game state (step B102; N), the left-handed command is prepared (step B103), the effect command setting process (step B104) is performed, and then the number of reserved figures is acquired. It is determined whether the number of reserved figures is less than the upper limit (for example, “4”) (step B105).

When the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved normal figures is updated by +1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved normal figures is calculated. (Step B107). Then, the hit random number is extracted, saved in the hit random number storage area of RWM (step B108), the hit symbol random number is extracted, saved in the hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is performed. To finish.

Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N), End the gate switch monitoring process.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-mentioned Fuzu game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the normal fluctuation winning switch monitoring process, first, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened a predetermined number of times while the normal fluctuation display game is in the hit state. Is being executed (step B201).
Then, in the case of hitting the normal drawing (step B201; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y). If it is determined, the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether the count number of the updated general electric counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (for example, "6") (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B204; Y). Then, the hit end pointer value (4 or 7 in this case) is loaded from the normal figure hit end pointer area and saved in the normal figure hit middle control pointer area (step B205). Then, the Fuzu game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step B206), and the Fuden winning switch monitoring process is completed. That is, if there is a prize for a regular train that exceeds the upper limit value during the hit state of the regular map, the hit state of the regular map ends in the middle at that point.

Further, when it is determined in step B201 that the normal drawing is not hit (step B201; N), when it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. When it is determined that the number of normal power counts is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step B204; N), the normal power winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 71, in the normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure hold number is "0" (step B301), and when the normal figure hold number is "0" (step B301; Y). ) Sets "0" as the processing number for shifting to the normal processing of the normal figure (step B322), and saves the processing number in the normal drawing game processing number area (step B323). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the Fuden fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the normal processing of the normal figure is terminated.

If the number of reserved figures is not "0" (step B301; N), the random number is loaded from the hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the RWM. , The hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) are cleared to 0 (step B302). Next, it is determined whether the probability of winning the result in the normal map fluctuation display game is in the high probability of the normal figure (that is, the low probability of the normal figure) is higher than the normal probability (that is, the low probability of the normal figure), that is, in the time saving state. (Step B303).

When the normal figure is not in the high probability (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the normal figure low probability is set (step B304), and when the normal figure is in the high probability (step B303). ; Y) sets the lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at the time of high probability in the normal figure (step B305).
After that, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B306), and if the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B306; Y), that is, if it is out of alignment, step B308. Move to.

When the value of the hit random number is not equal to or more than the upper limit determination value (step B306; N), it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in steps B304 or B305 (step B307).
If the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step B307; Y), that is, if it is out of order, the outlier information is saved in the hit flag area (step B308), and the outlier stop symbol number is set (step B309). ), The outlier symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B310), and the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314).

On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), that is, if it is a hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B311), and the step The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the hit symbol random number loaded in B302 is set (step B312), the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol is stopped. The number is saved in the normal figure stop symbol area (step B314). In the game machine of the present embodiment, there are two types of hit symbols, a hit symbol 1 which is an open pattern 1 and a hit symbol 2 which is an open pattern 2.

In the case of the present embodiment, the hit probability at the low probability of the normal figure is 0/251, the hit probability at the high probability of the normal figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is "251", and the low probability lower limit judgment value is. "251", the high probability lower limit determination value is "1". Therefore, when the probability is low in the normal figure, the value of the hit random number is deviated in all cases of "0" to "250". In addition, at the time of high probability of normal drawing, the case where the value of the hit random number is any of "1" to "250" is hit, and the case where the value of the hit random number is "0" is out of the question.

After saving the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
After that, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the number of reserved normal figures is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the order of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 held after the normal figure holding number 1 is moved up one by one. I do. By this processing, the value for the random number storage area for the normal figure from 2 to 4 is moved from the random number storage area for the normal figure for 1 to 3 for the random number. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.

Next, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is set, and the game is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B320). Here, as the fluctuation time, 500 ms is selected for 200/256, 1500 ms is selected for 40/256, and 3000 ms is selected for 16/256.
After that, the process transition setting process (step B321) during the fluctuation of the normal map is performed to end the normal process of the normal map.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map Transition setting processing]
FIG. 72 shows the process transition setting process (step B321) during the change of the normal map in the above-mentioned normal process of the normal map. In this process transition setting process during fluctuation of the normal map, first, "1" is set as the process number for shifting to the process during the change of the normal map (step B341), and the process number is saved in the normal map game process number area (step B341). Step B342).
After that, a signal related to the start of the normal figure fluctuation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B343) to indicate that the normal figure fluctuation display game is changing. The changing flag is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of the normal map (step B344).

Then, the blinking control timer initial value (100 ms in this case), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the ordinary figure display 74, is saved in the ordinary figure blinking control timer area (step B345), and is initially set in the ordinary figure fluctuation symbol number area. The value (here, 0) is saved (step B346), and the process transition setting process during the fluctuation of the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (step B9) in the above-mentioned normal map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in the normal map changing process, first, the process number is set to "2" as the setting process for shifting to the normal map display process (step B411), and the process number is set to the normal map game process number. Save to the area (step B412).
After that, the normal map display time (for example, 600 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal map variation display game on the normal map display 74, is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B413), and the fluctuation of the normal map ends. The signal (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and the stop flag indicating that the normal figure fluctuation display game is stopped is set in the normal figure fluctuation control flag area. Save (step B415), and end the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), "0" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal processing (step B515), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area. (Step B516). After that, the fraudulent monitoring period flag is saved in the Fuden fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the normal map display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hit flag is the hit information (step B503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the hit start pointer values (here, 0 and 5) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information are set. (Any of) is acquired and saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B505). Next, the hit end pointer value (here, either 4 or 7) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure stop pointer area (step B506), and the normal figure stop symbol information is supported. The normal power release time (here, either 1700 ms or 2600 ms) is acquired and saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B507).

After that, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal processing per normal figure (step B508), and the processing number is saved in the normal drawing game processing number area (step B509). After that, the signal related to the start of the normal symbol (for example, the signal for starting the normal electric symbol 1 is turned ON) and the signal related to the start of the normal electric operation (for example, the signal for starting the normal electric accessory 1 is turned ON) are set in the test signal output data area. Save (step B510).
Further, in order to output a signal for driving (on) the Fuden solenoid, on-data is saved in the Fuden solenoid output data area (step B511), and the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. Clear the information of the area (step B512), and clear the information of the area of the number of illegal winnings of the solenoid that stores the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 during the monitoring period of the illegality of the solenoid (step B513). Then, a flag (a flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period) that defines the outside of the fraudulent monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the process during display of the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the normal drawing hitting process, first, the normal drawing hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal drawing hitting control pointer is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. (Step B602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer per normal figure is updated by +1 (step B603), and the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B604) is performed. Go and finish the process during normal drawing.
When the value of the control pointer per normal figure is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B602; Y), the normal operation shifts without performing the process of updating the normal processing control pointer area per normal figure by +1 in step B603. The setting process (step B604) is performed to end the process during normal drawing.

[Public operation transition setting process]
FIG. 76 shows the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B604) in the above-mentioned normal process per drawing. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process of driving and controlling the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer (control pointer during normal drawing). I am trying to do it. In this normal electric operation transition setting process, first, a branch process according to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B611). The value of the control pointer used here is the value loaded in step B601 and is the value before the +1 update in step B603.

If the value of the control pointer is any of 0, 2 or 5, the process proceeds to step B612 and the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled in order to control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37. The later wait time (300 ms in this case) is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B612), and the off data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (step B613). , Ends the solenoid operation transition setting process.

If the value of the control pointer is either 1 or 3, the process proceeds to step B614 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is opened. The normal power release time (1700 ms in this case), which is the time, is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B614), and the on-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c (step B614). Step B615), the solenoid operation transition setting process is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is 6, the process proceeds to step B616 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, the solenoid is the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer. The open time (2600 ms in this case) is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B616), and the on-data is saved in the normal solenoid output data area to turn on the normal solenoid 37c (step B617). The electrical operation transition setting process is terminated.

If the value of the control pointer is either 4 or 7, the process proceeds to step B618, the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is terminated, and the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed. “4” is set (step B618). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B619), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time (here, 600 ms) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B620). After that, in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area (step B621), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

FIG. 77 shows the operation of the ordinary variable winning device 37 controlled by the above process. FIG. 77 (a) shows the case where the result is the hit symbol 1 (open pattern 1). When the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation display game ends (t81) and the normal map display time for displaying the winning result elapses (t82), the hit state is started and the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is started.

In the opening of the ordinary variable winning device 37, opening of 1700 ms (t82 to t83, t84 to t85, t86 to t87) and closing of 300 ms (t83 to t84, t85 to t86) are alternately performed. Then, when the third opening is completed (t87), the remaining ball processing time is 600 ms (t87 to t88), and then the ending time is 100 ms (t88 to t89). When the ending time ends (t89), the hit state ends and a new normal map variation display game can be executed.

FIG. 77 (b) shows the case where the result is the hit symbol 2 (open pattern 2). When the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation display game ends (t91) and the normal map display time for displaying the winning result elapses (t92), the hit state is started and the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is started. In the opening of the ordinary variable winning device 37, the opening of 2600 ms (t92 to t93, t94 to t95) is performed with the closure of 300 ms (t93 to t94). When the second opening is completed (t95), the remaining sphere processing time is 600 ms (t95 to t96), and then the ending time is 100 ms (t96 to t97). When the ending time ends (t97), the hit state ends and a new normal map variation display game can be executed.

If a predetermined number (6 in this case) of game balls wins the normal variable winning device 37 regardless of the opening pattern, the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 is completed at that point and the remaining ball processing is performed. It will be time.

[Public electric residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the Fuden residual ball processing (step B12) in the above-mentioned Fuzu game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in the normal power remaining ball processing, first, the processing number “5” related to the normal drawing end processing is set (step B711), and the processing number is saved in the normal drawing game processing number area (step B711). Step B712).

Next, the normal figure ending time (here, 100 msec) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B713), and a signal regarding the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 (for example, a signal during operation of the normal electric accessory 1 is transmitted. (OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the normal electric count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B715). Then, the control pointer area for hitting the normal figure is cleared (step B716), the end pointer area for hitting the normal figure is cleared (step B717), and the processing of the remaining sphere of the normal electric power is completed.

[End processing per drawing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end processing (step B13) in the above-mentioned general-figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 79, in the normal drawing end processing, first, the processing number “0” related to the normal drawing normal processing is set (step B811), and the processing number is saved in the normal drawing game processing number area (step). B812).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal fluctuation display game (for example, turning off the middle signal per normal symbol) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is defined. The flag to be used (flag during the fraudulent monitoring period) is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B814), and the normal end processing is completed.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55, the normal figure hold display 75, the first game state display unit 76, and the second game state display provided in the batch display device 50 are displayed. Settings related to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 77, the third game state display unit 78, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

As shown in FIG. 80, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blinking control timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and it is determined whether the output is on timing depending on whether or not the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1. (Step S502). In the present embodiment, when the bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on timing, so that a blinking cycle of 128 ms is created.

When the output is on timing (step S502; Y), the normal figure hold number display table 1 of the normal figure hold number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the normal figure hold indicator is defined is set. (Step S503), if the output is not on-timing (step S502; N), the normal figure hold number display table 2 is set (step S504). Then, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved normal figures is acquired from the set number of reserved normal figures display table, and saved in the segment area for the reserved number of normal figures provided in the RAM 111C (step S505). In the present embodiment, if the number of reserved figures is any one of "0" to "2", the display data will be the same regardless of which table of the number of reserved figures is set.

Next, it is determined whether the output is on-timing (step S506), and when the output is on-timing (step S506; Y), the number of special figure 1 holdes in which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step S507), and when the output is not on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set (step S507). Step S508). Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table, and is saved in the segment area for the special figure 1 hold display provided in the RAM 111C (step S509).

After that, it is determined whether the output is on-timing (step S510), and if the output is on-timing (step S510; Y), the display mode of the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step S511), and when the output is not on timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 is set (step). S512). Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 2 hold number display table, and is saved in the segment area for the special figure 2 hold display provided in the RAM 111C (step S513).
Further, a round display table in which the display mode of the round display unit is defined is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and a segment for the round display unit provided in the RAM 111C is obtained. Save to the area (step S515).

Next, when the time saving state occurs, the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 76 that lights up to notify the occurrence of the time saving state is set (step S516) is set (step S516), and the game state display number is set. The display data corresponding to the above is acquired and saved in the segment area for the first game state display unit 76 provided in the RAM 111C (step S517). In the present embodiment, the first game status display unit 76 composed of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal operation and turned on during special drawing time reduction (during normal power support).

After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 77 for notifying that the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed is set (step S518) is set. The display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area for the second game state display unit 77 provided in the RAM 111C (step S519). In the present embodiment, the second game status display unit 77 composed of one LED is turned off at the time of normal hitting (left hitting), and at the time of right hitting (in the case of this embodiment, during big hit, during normal electric support). It is configured to light up.

Then, it is determined whether the high probability notification flag that is turned on when the jackpot probability state is in the high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on is on (step S520), and the high probability notification flag is turned on. If (step S520; Y), the off-data of the high probability notification LED (third game status display unit 78) is saved in the segment area (step S521), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. If the high probability notification flag is off (step S520; N), the segment LED editing process ends without saving the off data of the high probability notification LED in the segment area.

[Abnormal discharge monitoring process]
Next, the details of the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step S113) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the number of game balls existing in each of the upper flow path 38j and the lower flow path 38k is managed, and when the discharge is detected even though the existing game balls are 0, an abnormal discharge error is made. Performs processing and processing related to cancellation of abnormal discharge error.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the abnormal discharge monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S551). When an abnormal discharge error is occurring, an abnormal discharge error flag is set in the abnormal discharge error flag area. Here, whether or not an abnormal discharge error is occurring depends on the presence or absence of this abnormal discharge error flag. judge.
If no abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S551; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the lower prize opening switch (step S552), and if there is no input (step S552; N), the process proceeds to step S554. To do. Further, when there is an input to the lower prize opening switch (step S552; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 1 that manages the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is updated by +1 (step S553), and the process proceeds to step S554. ..

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation operation area switch 38d has an input (step S554), and if there is no input (step S554; N), the process proceeds to step S558. Further, when there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch 38d (step S554; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 2 that manages the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step S555), and the abnormal discharge counter 1 is set. It is determined whether it is 0 (step S556).

When the abnormality discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S556; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform processing when an abnormality occurs. In the process when an abnormality occurs, an abnormal discharge error flag is prepared (step S565), an abnormal discharge occurrence command is prepared (step S566), and the process proceeds to step S572. That is, in this case, even though the abnormal discharge counter 1 that manages the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is 0, the input is input to the probability variation operation area switch 38d that detects the game balls flowing out from the upper flow path 38j. Since this is the case, the processing when an abnormality occurs is performed.

On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge counter 1 is not 0 (step S556; N), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is updated by -1 (step S557), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S558). If there is no input to the passage switch 38g (step S558; N), the process proceeds to step S562. When there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S558; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 2 is updated by +1 (step S559), and it is determined whether the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S560). Then, when the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S560; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform processing when an abnormality occurs. That is, in this case, even though the abnormal discharge counter 1 that manages the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is 0, there is an input to the passage port switch 38g that detects the game balls flowing out from the upper flow path 38j. In this case, the processing when an abnormality occurs is performed.

If the abnormal discharge counter 1 is not 0 (step S560; N), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is updated by -1 (step S561), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S562). If there is no input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S562; N), the process proceeds to step S570. Further, when there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S562; Y), it is determined whether the abnormal discharge counter 2 is 0 (step S563). Then, when the abnormal discharge counter 2 is 0 (step S563; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform processing when an abnormality occurs. That is, in this case, even though the abnormal discharge counter 2 that manages the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is 0, the input is input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e that detects the game balls discharged from the lower flow path 38k. Since this is the case, the processing when an abnormality occurs is performed.

If the abnormal discharge counter 2 is not 0 (step S563; N), the abnormal discharge counter 2 is updated by -1 (step S564), and the process proceeds to step S570. In this case, no abnormality has occurred. After that, the abnormal discharge release flag is prepared (step S570), the abnormal discharge release command is prepared (step S571), and it is determined whether the value in the abnormal discharge error flag area and the prepared flag match (step S572).

On the other hand, when an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S551; Y), it is determined whether or not the initialization switch 112 has an input (step S567), and when there is no input (step S567; N), abnormal discharge is performed. End the monitoring process. In this case, the state in which the abnormal discharge error is occurring continues. When there is an input to the initialization switch (step S567; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is cleared to 0 (step S568) and the abnormal discharge counter 2 is cleared to 0 (step S568) as a process for canceling the abnormal discharge error. S569). After that, the abnormal discharge release flag is prepared (step S570), the abnormal discharge release command is prepared (step S571), and it is determined whether the value in the abnormal discharge error flag area and the prepared flag match (step S572).

If the value in the abnormal discharge error flag area and the prepared flag match (step S572; Y), the abnormal discharge monitoring process ends.
If the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area and the prepared flag do not match (step S572; N), the prepared flag is saved in the abnormal discharge error flag area (step S573), and the effect command setting process is performed (step S573). S574). As a result, either an abnormal discharge occurrence command or an abnormal discharge release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 notifies that an abnormal discharge error is occurring when the abnormal discharge occurrence command is received. Since this abnormal discharge error is an error that stops the game, the progress of the effect is also stopped, and the error notification is continuously performed while the abnormal discharge error occurs. In addition, when the abnormal discharge release command is received, the effect of the game is restarted, and the notification that the abnormal discharge error is occurring is terminated.

After that, it is determined whether the new flag is the abnormal discharge release flag (step S574), and if it is not the abnormal discharge release flag (step S574; N), the abnormal discharge monitoring process ends.
Further, when the abnormal discharge release flag is set (step S574; Y), that is, when the abnormal discharge error is canceled based on the operation of the initialization switch 112, it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration is in progress. Then, when the customer waiting demonstration is not in progress (step S576; N), the abnormal discharge monitoring process ends.
If the customer waiting demo is in progress (step S576; Y), the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step S577), the effect command setting process is performed (step S578), and the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated. The game is restarted when the error occurs, but if the demo state is waiting for customers at the time of restarting, the command is not sent to the effect control device 300 by other processing. Therefore, the effect control device 300 is used here. By sending a customer waiting demo command to, the production of the customer waiting demo state is started.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S114) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). It is determined whether or not the magnetism is detected (step S601).
When the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the detection period of abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 (step S602), and the timer is concerned. Determines if the time is up (step S603). In the case of the present embodiment, it is determined that the time has expired when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 ms or longer.

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer (step S604). For example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud generation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period of time (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud that defines the notification time of the magnet fraud is specified. If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step S610). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step S603; N), the process proceeds to step S609.

Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not "0" (step S610; N), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step S610; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, and the fraud notification period ends or is fraudulent from the beginning. If the notification is not performed, a command to end the magnet illegal notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the prepared magnet invalid flag does not match the value in the magnet invalid flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet invalid flag is saved in the magnet invalid flag area (step S614), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process is completed. Here, "step S601; N"-> "step S608"-> "step S609"-> "step S610; Y"-> "step S611"-> "step S612"-> "step S613; Y" is the normal route.

[Screen radio wave fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S115) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of the fraudulent notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, It is determined whether the panel radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, a state in which an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701).
When the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

Then, a command for illegally notifying the board radio wave is prepared (step S703), a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S704), and the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is detected a predetermined number of times, while in the case of panel radio wave fraud, the panel radio wave sensor 62 is detected once. At that point, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S701; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is not "0" or -1. Update (step S705). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step S706).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not "0" (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step S706; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the fraudulent notification period ends or is fraudulent from the beginning. If the notification is not performed, a command to end the illegal radio wave notification is prepared (step S707), a radio wave illegal cancellation flag is prepared as a radio wave illegal flag (step S708), and the prepared radio wave illegal flag is set. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value of the board radio wave invalid flag area (step S709).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the prepared board radio wave fraud flag does not match the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S710), and the effect command is given. The setting process is performed (step S711), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Here, "step S701; N"-> "step S705"-> "step S706; Y"-> "step S707"-> "step S708"-> "step S709; Y" is the normal route.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S116) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results of each process, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or amusement park internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer. ..

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, in the external information editing process, first, it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality error such as a switch connector disconnection is occurring (step S751), and when the switch abnormality error is not occurring (step S751). In step S751; N), the off-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S752), and the process proceeds to step S754. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step S751; Y), the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S753), and the process proceeds to step S754.

Then, when the glass frame opening error has not occurred (step S754; N) and the main body frame opening error has not occurred (step S755; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is set to the external information output data area. The data is saved (step S756), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S757), and the process proceeds to step S760.
On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S754; Y), or when a main body frame opening error is occurring (step S755; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S758), the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S759), and the process proceeds to step S760.

Then, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", the security signal control timer is updated by -1 (. Step S760). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the RAM is cleared in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S761).

If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S761; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S762), and step S763. Move to the processing of.
Further, when the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S761; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the process of step S762 is not performed and the process of step S763 is performed. Transition.

Then, as shown in FIG. 85, abnormal discharge error, magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, remaining ball error, discharge ball error, V abnormal passage error, upper prize opening fraud, lower prize prize opening fraud, general electric fraud and vibration. When at least one of the frauds is occurring (at least one of steps S763 to S772 is Y), the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S773), and the on-data of the security signal is saved. Is saved in the external information output data area (step S776), and the process proceeds to step S777. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information.

On the other hand, abnormal discharge error, magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, remaining ball error, discharge ball error, V abnormal passage error, upper prize opening fraud, lower prize opening fraud, general electric fraud and vibration fraud have all occurred. If not (all of steps S763 to S772 are N), the process proceeds to step S774. Then, if the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (step S774; N) and there is no probability variation operation area abnormal passage information (step S775; N), the process proceeds to step S777. Further, when the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S774; Y) or there is the probability variation operation area abnormal passage information (step S775; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S776). ), The process proceeds to step S777. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information.

Then, the main prize ball signal editing process (step S777) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal editing process (step S778) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed.
Next, if the symbol confirmation number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the execution number of the special figure variation display game is not "0", the number is updated by -1 (step S779). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is "0" (step S780).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is "0" (step S780; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S781), the external information editing process is terminated.
If the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is not "0" (step S780; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). S781), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S777) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described. The main prize ball signal editing process externally outputs the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in the case of this embodiment). This is the process of outputting to the device.

As shown in FIG. 86, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0”, -1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of main prize ball signal output is "0" (step S833).

When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is not "0" (step S833; N), the number of main prize ball signal outputs is updated by -1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is filled with the main prize ball. The initial value of the signal output control timer is saved (step S835). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is out of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. The on-state time (for example, 128 ms) is set. After that, the on-data that turns on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.
When the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is "0" (step S833; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0" (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0". When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step S836; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 10 game balls. It is configured so that the main prize ball signal is output each time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the number of main prize ball number signal outputs by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) for every 10 payout schedules (every time a payout command is transmitted). The main prize ball signal is output for the set number of outputs.
With respect to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the payout control device 200 transmits a prize ball signal every time 10 payouts are actually made, so that the schedule and the result can be matched. It is possible to deal with fraudulent payouts. In addition, even if a prize is won during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to the ball running out, etc., and even if the payout is made after the big hit ends, the hall control (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judgment).

[Start port signal editing process]
Next, the details of the start port signal editing process (step S778) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described. The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 87, in the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not “0”, the start port signal output control timer is updated by -1 (step S841). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start port signal output control timer is "0" (step S842). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is "0" (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the number of start port signal outputs is "0" (step S843).

When the number of start port signal outputs is not "0" (step S843; N), the number of start port signal outputs is updated by -1 (step S844), and the start port signal output control timer is set in the start port signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is one of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 msec) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 msec) of the start port signal. The on-state time (for example, 128 ms) is set. After that, the on-data that turns on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the start port signal editing process is completed.
When the number of start port signal outputs is "0" (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). S848), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not "0" (step S842; N), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S846). The fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is not "0". When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. When the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S846; N). Step S848), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, both the opening time of the large winning opening and the number of game balls won in the large winning opening (the number of winnings in the large winning opening) are counted by the timer interrupt processing.
Specifically, the opening time of the large winning opening (special variable winning devices 38, 39) is counted in the special figure game processing (step S110) of the timer interrupt processing. More specifically, the game control device 100 saves the large winning opening opening time in the special figure game processing timer area in step A863 of the fanfare / interval processing (step A14) in the special figure game processing, and saves the special figure game. In step A6 of the process, the special figure game processing timer is updated by -1.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that a power failure has occurred in the power failure monitoring process (steps S36 to S38 of the main process), the game control device 100 temporarily performs a process (step S39) of disabling interrupts, and outputs the entire output. The process of outputting off-data to the port (step S40) is performed. That is, when a power failure occurs, timer interrupt processing is prohibited, and the second output port 134 for outputting the operation data of the large winning port solenoids 38b and 39b, the normal electric solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f is also turned off. Data is output. Since the opening time of the big winning opening is counted by the timer interrupt processing, if the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the opening time of the big winning opening is not counted. Further, when the off-data is output to the second output port 134, the opening / closing doors 38c and 38c of the large winning opening and the movable member 37b of the general electric train start the closing operation (the operation toward the closed state).

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 88A and 88B, when the opening timing of the upper prize opening is reached, the opening / closing door 39c of the upper prize opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened (open state). (Operation toward) is started, and the count of the opening time of the big winning opening is turned on (t101, t111). In addition, when the opening timing of the lower prize opening comes, the opening operation of the opening / closing door 38c of the lower prize opening (first special variable winning device 38) is started, and the count of the opening time of the lower prize opening is turned on. (T101, t111).
After that, when a power failure occurs, the closing operation of the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c is started along with the occurrence of the power failure, and the counting of the opening time of the large winning opening is turned off and the counting is interrupted. (T103, t112).
Then, along with the recovery from the power failure, the opening operation of the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c is started, and the counting of the opening time of the large winning opening is turned on and the counting is restarted (t105, t114). ..

Here, the state in which the count of the opening time of the large winning opening is ON means, for example, the state in which the counting of the opening time of the large winning opening is being executed, that is, the opening time of the large winning opening in the special figure game processing timer area. Is saved and timer interrupt processing is being executed at a predetermined time cycle.
Further, the state in which the count of the opening time of the large winning opening is OFF means, for example, the state in which the counting of the opening time of the large winning opening is not executed, that is, the opening time of the large winning opening is in the special figure game processing timer area. In the unsaved state, the large winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, but the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, and the large winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. However, the power of the game machine is cut off and the timer interrupt process cannot be executed.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 88A, if a power failure occurs while the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c of the large winning opening are in the open state (fully open state), the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c are opened. The period (t101 to t102, t105 to t106) and the period (t102 to t103, t106 to) in which the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c are in the open state (fully open state) are the opening times (control) of the large winning opening. While included in the above opening time), the period during which the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c are in the closing operation (t103 to t104) is not included in the opening time of the large winning opening (control opening time).
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 88B, if a power failure occurs while the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c of the large winning opening are in the opening operation, the period during which the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c are in the opening operation. (T111 to t112, t114 to t116) and the period (t116 to) in which the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c are in the open state (fully open state) are included in the opening time (control opening time) of the large winning opening. On the other hand, the period during which the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c are in the closing operation (t112 to t113) is not included in the opening time (control opening time) of the large winning opening.

Further, the number of winnings to the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 38, 39) is counted by the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) of the timer interrupt process. More specifically, the game control device 100 sets the value of the winning number counter area in the winning number counter update processing (step S331) of the fraud & winning monitoring processing (steps S302 and S304) in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. Update +1.
As described above, timer interrupt processing is prohibited when a power failure occurs. Since the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted by the timer interrupt processing, if the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the number of winnings to the large winning opening will not be counted.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), when a power failure occurs, the count of the number of winnings to the large winning opening is turned off and the count is counted as the power failure occurs. Is interrupted (t103, t112). Then, with the recovery from the power failure, the count of the number of winnings to the large winning opening is turned ON and the counting is restarted (t105, t114).

Here, the state in which the count of the number of winnings in the large winning opening is ON means, for example, the state in which the number of winnings in the large winning opening can be counted, that is, the timer interrupt processing is executed in a predetermined time cycle. is there.
Further, the state in which the counting of the number of winnings in the large winning opening is OFF means, for example, the state in which the number of winnings in the large winning opening cannot be counted, that is, the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, and the power supply of the gaming machine is turned on. It is in a state where it is blocked and timer interrupt processing cannot be executed.

Similarly, in the present embodiment, both the opening time of the Fuden and the number of game balls that have won the Fuden (the number of winnings to the Fuden) are counted by the timer interrupt processing.
Specifically, the opening time of the Fuden (ordinary variable winning device 37) is counted in the Fuzu game process (step S111) of the timer interrupt process. More specifically, the game control device 100 is used in step B507 of the normal map display process (step B10) in the normal map game process and step B604 of the normal map hitting process (step B11) in the normal map game process. The power release time is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area, and the normal figure game processing timer is updated by -1 in step B3 of the normal figure game processing.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 88A and 88B, when the opening timing of the normal electric power is reached, the opening operation of the movable member 37b of the general electric power (ordinary variable winning device 37) is started and the general electric power is opened. The opening time count is turned on (t101, t111).
After that, when a power failure occurs, the closing operation of the movable member 37b is started along with the occurrence of the power failure, and the count of the opening time of the normal electric power is turned off and the count is interrupted ( t103, t112).
Then, along with the recovery from the power failure, the opening operation of the movable member 37b is started, and the count of the opening time of the general electric power is turned ON and the counting is restarted (t105, t114).

Here, the state in which the count of the open time of the normal power is ON means, for example, the state in which the count of the open time of the normal power is being executed, that is, the normal power release time is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area. This is a state in which timer interrupt processing is being executed at a predetermined time cycle.
Further, the state in which the count of the open time of the normal power is OFF means, for example, the state in which the count of the open time of the normal power is not executed, that is, the normal power release time is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area. No state, the normal power release time is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area, but the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the normal power release time is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area, but the game machine The power is cut off and timer interrupt processing cannot be executed.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), when a power failure occurs when the movable member 37b of the normal electric power is in the open state (fully open state), the period during which the movable member 37b is in the open operation ( t101 to t102, t105 to t106) and the period (t102 to t103, t106 to) in which the movable member 37b is in the open state (fully open state) are included in the power opening time (control opening time). On the other hand, the period during which the movable member 37b is in the closing operation (t103 to t104) is not included in the power opening time (control opening time).
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), when a power failure occurs while the movable member 37b of the normal electric power is in the opening operation, the period during which the movable member 37b is in the opening operation (t111 to t112, t114 to t116) and the period (t116 to) in which the movable member 37b is in the open state (fully open state) are included in the power opening time (controllable opening time), while the movable member 37b is closed. The middle period (t112 to t113) is not included in the power outage opening time (control opening time).

Further, the number of winnings to the Fuden (normal variable winning device 37) is counted by the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing (step S108) of the timer interrupt processing. More specifically, the game control device 100 updates the value of the winning number counter area by +1 in the winning number counter update processing (step S331) of the fraud & winning monitoring process (step S306) in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. To do.
Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), when a power failure occurs, the count of the number of winnings to the public train is turned off and the count is reduced due to the occurrence of the power failure. It is interrupted (t103, t112). Then, with the recovery from the power failure, the count of the number of winnings to the public train is turned ON and the count is restarted (t105, t114).

Here, the state in which the count of the number of winnings to the Fuden is ON is, for example, a state in which the number of winnings to the Fuden can be counted, that is, a state in which the timer interrupt process is executed in a predetermined time cycle.
Further, the state in which the counting of the number of winnings to the Fuden is OFF means, for example, the state in which the number of winnings to the Fuden cannot be counted, that is, the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, and the power of the gaming machine is cut off. However, the timer interrupt processing cannot be executed.

In the present embodiment, if a power failure occurs while the opening / closing members (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c and movable member 37b) of the large winning opening and the general electric power are in the opening operation, for example, it is shown in FIG. 88 (b). As described above, the length of the period (t111 to t112) in which the opening / closing member is in the opening operation immediately before the occurrence of the power failure, the length of the period (t112 to t113) in which the opening / closing member is in the closing operation immediately after the occurrence of the power failure, and immediately after the power failure is restored. Of the period during which the opening / closing member is in the opening operation, the length of the period (t114 to t115) until the opening amount (opening degree) of the opening / closing member coincides with the opening amount at the time of power failure is the same.

By the way, the big prize opening and the general electric train are not only in the period when the opening / closing members (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c and the movable member 37b) are in the open operation and the open state (fully open state), but also in the closing operation. The period is also open. Of course, the opening amount of the opening / closing member during the period during the opening operation and the period during the closing operation is smaller than the maximum opening amount (opening amount in the open state (fully open state)).
Therefore, in the conventional game machine, in order to ensure the consistency between the apparent opening time (physical opening time) and the control opening time, the period during which the opening / closing member is in the closing operation immediately after the occurrence of a power failure. (T103 to t104 in the case of FIG. 88 (a), t112 to t113 in the case of FIG. 88 (b); hereinafter referred to as “the period during the closing operation”) is also included in the control opening time, that is, the period during the closing operation is also included. In some cases, the opening time count was left ON.

However, when the period during the closing operation is included in the control opening time, the remaining opening time (the first opening time after the power failure is restored) is shortened, which is disadvantageous to the player.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), when a power failure occurs during the counting of the opening time, the game control device 100 counts the opening time from the continuation when the power failure is restored. To resume. Therefore, when the closing operation period is included in the control opening time, the remaining opening time is shortened by the length of the closing operation period. That is, the start timing of the first closing operation after the power failure is restored (for example, the timing when the opening / closing member opened immediately after the power failure is restored to start the closing operation) is advanced by the length of the period during the closing operation. It is disadvantageous for.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, it is disadvantageous for the player by configuring so that the period during the closing operation is not included in the control opening time (that is, the opening time count is turned off during the closing operation period). It is possible to perform control that does not become. This period during the closing operation is a period in which the count of the winning balls to the big winning opening and the public train is in the OFF state, so it is not actually an advantageous period for the player, but the big winning opening and the public electric train. It can be said that it is a period that seems to be advantageous to the player because it is a period in which is open.
That is, in the present embodiment, the period during the closing operation (the period during which the opening / closing member is in the closing operation immediately after the occurrence of a power failure) is a period during which the game ball may flow into the grand prize opening or the Fuden, but the closing is performed. It can be said that this is an apparently advantageous period because the game balls that have flowed into the large winning opening or the power outage during the operation period are not counted as winning balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs off-data to all output ports when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. That is, when a power failure occurs, energization of various devices (solenoid, batch display device 50, etc.) controlled by the game control device 100 is forcibly stopped.
On the other hand, the effect control device 300 is not configured to input the power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400, and is not configured to notify the occurrence of the power failure from the game control device 100. The effect control device 300 cannot determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs, energization of various devices (display device 41, board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18, board effect device 44, speakers 19a, 19b, etc.) controlled by the effect control device 300 is forced. Not stopped. That is, when a power failure occurs, the amount of electricity supplied to the various devices controlled by the effect control device 300 naturally decreases and eventually becomes zero.

Therefore, when a power failure occurs, the various devices controlled by the effect control device 300 stop operating after the device whose energization is forcibly stopped when a power failure occurs (for example, various devices controlled by the game control device 100). To do. At that time, the various devices controlled by the effect control device 300 are those operating at 32V (motors, solenoids, etc.) → those operating at 15V (motors, LEDs, speakers 19a, 19b, etc.) → 12V. The operation is stopped in the order of those that operate (display device 41, motor, LED, etc.) → those that operate at 5V.
Therefore, when a power failure occurs, the decorative device (LED) controlled by the effect control device 300 operates after the opening / closing members (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c and movable member 37b) of the large winning opening and the general electric power are closed. Since it is stopped, the closing operation of the opening / closing member can be performed in an illuminated state, and the closing operation of the opening / closing member can be made conspicuous.

The effect control device 300 may be configured so that a power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is input, or the game control device 100 may be configured to notify the occurrence of a power failure.
That is, the effect control device 300 may be configured to determine the presence or absence of a power failure. Further, the effect control device 300 can determine whether or not a power failure has occurred, and when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the effect control device 300 forcibly energizes at least a part of various devices controlled by the effect control device 300. It may be configured to stop at.

As described above, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a winning opening (special variable winning device 38, 39 or ordinary variable winning device 37) that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c and movable member 37b). In the machine, a power failure occurs: a counting means (game control device 100) for counting (counting) the number of game balls won in the winning opening, a time measuring means (game control device 100) for measuring (counting) the opening time of the opening / closing member, and a power failure. A power failure determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether or not a power failure has occurred is provided, and the counting means is provided with a game when it is determined by the power failure determination means that a power failure has occurred (step S38; Y). The number of balls is not counted (step S39), and the opening / closing member is converted into an open state (a state in which the large winning opening or the power is open) and a closed state (a state in which the large winning opening or the power is closed). It is possible, and when it is determined by the power failure determining means that a power failure has occurred during the opening operation toward the open state (step S38; Y), the blocking operation toward the blocked state is immediately executed (step). S40), when the power failure determining means determines that a power failure has occurred during the opening operation (step S38; Y), the time measuring means measures the opening time during the opening operation immediately before the occurrence of the power failure. However, the opening time is not measured during the closing operation immediately after the occurrence of the power failure (step S39).

Therefore, since the remaining opening time (the first opening time after the power failure is restored) is not shortened, the opening time is not disadvantageous to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the occurrence of the power failure.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a power failure occurs in the middle of the opening operation and the game recovers from the power failure, the timekeeping means (game control device 100) is released from the continuation of the timekeeping until immediately before the power failure occurs. It can be configured to resume timekeeping.
With such a configuration, the fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained because there are no players who are advantageous and disadvantageous in terms of opening time due to the occurrence of a power failure.

<Modification example 1>
For example, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, it is also possible to configure the processing of steps S36 to S45 of the main processing in the above embodiment to be performed by the timer interrupt processing.
Specifically, in the main process in this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 89, the power failure monitoring process (steps S36 to S38) is not performed after the initial value random number update process in step S35, but in step S35. It is configured to repeat the initial value random number update process.

Further, in the timer interrupt processing in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 90, for example, after performing the processing of steps S101 and S102, the power failure monitoring processing (steps S36 to S38) is performed. Specifically, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step S101), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S102). Next, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is set (step S36), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37).
If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the processes of steps S103 to S116 are performed. When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38).
If the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the processing of steps S40 to S45 is performed, and then the game machine. It is configured to wait for the power to be cut off.

<Modification 2>
For example, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), in the main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, instead of the process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step S40), an output port other than the second output port 134 ( It is also possible to configure the process (step S40a) of outputting off-data to the third output port 135, the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137).
With this configuration, off-data is not output to the second output port 134 for outputting the operation data of the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the normal electric solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f when a power failure occurs. , The period during the closing operation (the period that seems to be advantageous to the player) can be prolonged, and the player does not feel lost.

Specifically, in the case of this modification, even if a power failure occurs, the energization of the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the normal electric solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f is not forcibly stopped. That is, when a power failure occurs, the amount of electricity supplied to the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the normal electric solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f naturally decreases and eventually becomes zero. On the other hand, when off-data is output to the second output port 134 when a power failure occurs as in the above embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the normal electric solenoid 37c, and the lever The energization of the solenoid 38f is forcibly stopped.
Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the case of this modified example, the period during the closing operation is longer than in the case of the above embodiment (when indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 91 (b)).

The large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the normal electric solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f have a built-in return spring, and when the energization of the solenoid is turned off, the movable iron core is in the initial position by the action of the return spring. It is configured to return to.
When off-data is output to the second output port 134 when a power failure occurs as in the above embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the normal electric solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f are displayed. The amount of energization of is immediately reduced to 0. That is, when a power failure occurs, the force against the urging force of the return spring sharply decreases.
On the other hand, if off-data is not output to the second output port 134 when a power failure occurs as in this modification, when a power failure occurs, the grand prize opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the normal electric solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f The amount of electricity supplied to the solenoid naturally decreases and eventually becomes zero. That is, when a power failure occurs, the force that opposes the urging force of the return spring gradually decreases.
Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 91B, if off-data is not output to the second output port 134 when a power failure occurs, off-data is also output to the second output port 134 when a power failure occurs. Compared to the case of output, the closing operation of the opening / closing members (opening / closing doors 38c, 38c and movable member 37b) is started later, and the closing operation speed of the opening / closing member is slower. The medium period can be prolonged.

Further, the big winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the general electric solenoid 37c and the lever solenoid 38f operate at 32V, while the decoration device (LED) controlled by the effect control device 300 operates at 15V or 12V.
Therefore, in the case of this modification, when a power failure occurs, the decoration device controlled by the effect control device 300 after the opening / closing members (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c and movable members 37b) of the large winning opening and the general electric power are closed. Since the operation of the (LED) is stopped, the closing operation of the opening / closing member can be performed in the illuminated state, and the closing operation of the opening / closing member can be made conspicuous.

Further, in this modification, since off-data is output to output ports other than the second output port 134 when a power failure occurs, the batch display device 50 is completely turned off when a power failure occurs. Therefore, when a power failure occurs, the operation of the batch display device 50 is stopped before the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c of the large winning opening, the movable member 37b of the general electric power, and the lever member 38i in the first special variable winning device 38.

In this modified example, when a power failure occurs when the opening / closing members (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c and movable member 37b) are in the open state (fully open state) (as shown in FIG. 91 (b)). Not only that, even if a power failure occurs while the opening / closing member is in the opening operation, off data is not output to the second output port 134 when the power failure occurs. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs while the opening / closing member is in the opening operation, the period during the closing operation can be extended.

Of course, this modification can also be applied when the processing of steps S36 to S45 of the main processing in the above embodiment is performed by the timer interrupt processing as in the modification 1. That is, even when the processes of steps S36 to S45 are performed by the timer interrupt process, the output ports other than the second output port 134 (third output) are replaced with the process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step S40). It is possible to configure the process (step S40a) of outputting off-data to the port 135, the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137).

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is a game provided with a winning opening (special variable winning device 38, 39 or ordinary variable winning device 37) that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c and movable member 37b). In the machine, the opening / closing member solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b,) that converts the opening / closing member from the closed state (the state where the large winning opening or the general electric power is closed) to the open state (the state where the large winning opening or the general electric power is open). 39b and the solenoid solenoid 37c), an opening / closing control means (game control device 100) that controls a solenoid for an opening / closing member, a counting means (game control device 100) that counts the number of game balls that have won a prize in the winning opening, and a power failure. A power failure determining means (game control device 100) for determining whether or not a power failure has occurred, and the counting means are provided with a game when it is determined by the power failure determining means that a power failure has occurred (step S38; Y). The counting of the number of balls is not executed (step S39), and the opening / closing control means performs opening control for converting the opening / closing member to the open state (output of on-data to the second output port 134) and returns to the closed state. Blocking control (output of off-data to the second output port 134) for the purpose is feasible, and when it is determined by the power failure determining means that a power failure has occurred (step S38; Y), the opening control is performed. And the blockage control is not executed (step S40a).

Therefore, even if a power failure occurs, the blocking control for returning the opening / closing member to the blocked state is not executed (off data is not output to the second output port 134), so that the timing at which the opening / closing member starts the closing operation and the opening / closing member It is possible to delay at least one of the operation speed when the block operation is performed. That is, since the period during the closing operation can be prolonged, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the occurrence of a power failure.
Further, since the period during the closing operation can be prolonged, the player can grasp the state of the opening / closing member immediately before the occurrence of the power failure even after the occurrence of the power failure.
In addition, since the period during the closing operation can be extended, the timing at which the counting of the number of game balls is interrupted when a power failure occurs (when a power failure occurs) and the opening / closing member reach the blocked state when a power failure occurs. The time difference between the timing and the timing can be made larger.

<Modification example 3>
For example, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), the main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 is an output port other than the second output port 134 (step S40) instead of the process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step S40). The process of outputting off-data to the third output port 135, the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137) is performed (step S40a), and the validity determination data storage process (steps S41 to S44) and the RWM are performed. It is also possible to configure the process of outputting off-data to the second output port 134 (step S40b) with the process of prohibiting the access (step S45).

With this configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), not when a power failure occurs (t132), but a predetermined time (specifically, data storage for validity determination) after the power failure occurs. When the processing time (for example, 0.5 ms) of the processing (steps S41 to S44) has elapsed (t133), the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening and the opening / closing member (opening / closing door 38c, 39c and movable member 37b) of the general electric power is closed. Is started, so that the period during the closing operation (the period that seems to be advantageous to the player) can be prolonged, and the player does not feel lost.

In this modified example, not only when a power failure occurs while the opening / closing members (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c and movable member 37b) are in the opening operation (as shown in FIG. 92B), but also. Even if a power failure occurs when the opening / closing member is in the open state (completely open state), off-data is output to the second output port 134 after the validity determination data storage process (steps S41 to S44). Therefore, even if a power failure occurs when the opening / closing member is in the open state (fully open state), the period during the closing operation can be extended.

Further, in FIG. 92A, there is also a process (step S40a) of outputting off-data to output ports (third output port 135, fourth output port 136, and fifth output port 137) other than the second output port 134. , May be performed after the data storage process for validity determination (steps S41 to S44).
Of course, this modification can also be applied when the processing of steps S36 to S45 of the main processing in the above embodiment is performed by the timer interrupt processing as in the modification 1.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is a game provided with a winning opening (special variable winning device 38, 39 or ordinary variable winning device 37) that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c and movable member 37b). In the machine, the solenoid for the opening / closing member (large winning opening solenoid 38b, which converts the opening / closing member from the closed state (the state where the large winning opening or the general electric power is closed) to the open state (the state where the large winning opening or the general electric power is open). 39b and solenoid solenoid 37c), an opening / closing control means (game control device 100) that controls a solenoid for an opening / closing member, a counting means (game control device 100) that counts the number of game balls that have won a prize in the winning opening, and a power failure. A power failure determining means (game control device 100) for determining whether or not a power failure has occurred, and the counting means are provided with a game when it is determined by the power failure determining means that a power failure has occurred (step S38; Y). The counting of the number of balls is not executed (step S39), and the opening / closing control means performs opening control for converting the opening / closing member to the open state (output of on-data to the second output port 134) and returns to the closed state. Blockage control (output of off-data to the second output port 134) for the purpose is possible, and when it is determined by the power failure determination means that a power failure has occurred (step S38; Y), the blockage control is performed. Is executed after a lapse of a predetermined time (step S40b).

Therefore, in the event of a power failure, the block control is executed to return the opening / closing member to the block state after a lapse of a predetermined time, so that the period during the block operation can be extended, and the interest associated with the power failure can be reduced. It can be suppressed.
In addition, by executing the blockage control for returning the opening / closing member to the blockage state after a lapse of a predetermined time, it is possible to shift to a natural blockage operation even when a power failure occurs, which is detrimental to the player's interest (cutting off). ) Never.

Specifically, the game machine 10 of this modified example is stored in a storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing various data even when a backup power is supplied and a power failure occurs, and in the storage means when the power is turned on. When it is determined by the validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining the validity of the predetermined data and the power failure determination means (game control device 100) that a power failure has occurred (step S38; Y). A data generation means (game control device 100) for executing a process of generating predetermined data and storing it in a storage means (validity determination data storage process (steps S41 to S44)) is provided, and after a lapse of a predetermined time. Is configured to be after the process has been executed by the data generation means.

That is, when the open / close control means (game control device 100) determines that a power failure has occurred by the power failure determination means (game control device 100) (step S38; Y), the data generation means (game control device 100) ) The blockage control is executed after the process (validity determination data storage process (steps S41 to S44)) is executed (step S40b).
Therefore, when a power failure occurs, after the validity determination data storage process (steps S41 to S44) is executed, the blocking control for returning the opening / closing member to the blocked state is executed, so that the blocking operation period is in progress. Can be prolonged, and the decline in interest due to the occurrence of a power outage can be effectively suppressed.

<Modification example 4>
For example, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), in the main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, instead of the process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step S40), an output port other than the second output port 134 ( Processing to output off-data to the 3rd output port 135, 4th output port 136, and 5th output port 137) (step S40a) ) Is configured to wait for the delay time to elapse until it becomes a completely open state (step S46), and to output off-data to the second output port 134 after the delay time elapses (step S40b). It is also possible to do.

In this modification, as the delay time until the opening / closing door 38c starts the opening operation, the delay time until the opening / closing door 38c starts the opening operation and the opening / closing door 39c starts the opening operation, and then the opening / closing door 39c is completely opened. The longest time among the time until the state is reached and the time from the start of the opening operation of the movable member 37b to the completely open state is set. As a result, if a power failure occurs while the opening / closing members (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c and movable member 37b) are in the opening operation, the timing of the power failure (at what timing during the opening operation of the opening / closing member) the power failure occurred. ) Regardless of the above, since the opening / closing member can move to the closing operation after being in the completely opened state, it does not hurt the interest of the player.

With this configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), the opening operation is started for a predetermined time (specifically, the opening operation is started) after the power failure occurs, not when the power failure occurs (t142). When (t143) elapses (the same time as the time from when the door is completely opened), the closing operation of the opening / closing member (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c and movable member 37b) of the large winning opening and the power failure is started. Therefore, the period during the closing operation (the period that seems to be advantageous to the player) can be prolonged, and the player does not feel lost. Further, regardless of the timing of the occurrence of the power failure, the opening / closing member can move to the closing operation after being in the completely opened state, so that the player's interest is not impaired.

The delay time until the fully opened state can be changed as appropriate.
For example, the time from when the opening / closing member starts the opening operation until the power failure occurs (the length of t141 to t142 in the case of FIG. 93B) is measured, and after the opening operation is started, the completely opened state is obtained. It is also possible to subtract the measured time from the time until the value becomes (pre-stored time) and set the subtraction result as the delay time until the fully open state is reached. With this configuration, for example, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 93 (b), the opening / closing member can immediately move to the closing operation when it is in the completely open state.

In addition, if the time from when the game ball is launched to when it flows into the winning area is longer than the time from when the opening / closing member starts the opening operation to when it is in the fully opened state, until it is in the fully opened state. As the delay time of, it is also possible to set the time from when the game ball is launched until it flows into the winning area. With this configuration, until all the game balls remaining in the game area 32 at the time of the power failure (the game balls flowing down the game area 32) flow into the winning area or the out port 30a, the large winning opening or the out opening Since the power outage can be left open, the player does not feel lost.

Further, the time from the occurrence of the power failure to the stop of the operation of the decoration device (LED) controlled by the effect control device 300 is more than the time from the start of the opening operation to the completely open state of the opening / closing member. If is long, the delay time until the fully open state is set so as to set the time from the occurrence of the power failure to the stop of the operation of the decoration device (LED) controlled by the effect control device 300. It is also possible. With this configuration, the operation of the opening / closing member of the grand prize opening and the general electric power is stopped substantially at the same time as the operation of the decorative device (LED) controlled by the effect control device 300, so that the opening / closing member is closed. The operation can be linked with the operation of turning off the decorative device (LED), and the closing operation of the opening / closing member can be made conspicuous.

Further, in this modification, not only when a power failure occurs while the opening / closing members (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c and movable member 37b) are in the opening operation (as shown in FIG. 93B), but also. Even if a power failure occurs when the opening / closing member is in the open state (fully open state), off data is output to the second output port 134 after the delay time until the fully open state elapses. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs when the opening / closing member is in the open state (fully open state), the period during the closing operation can be extended, and the opening / closing member moves to the closing operation after being in the completely open state. Can be done.

Further, in FIG. 93A, the process of waiting for the delay time until the fully opened state elapses (step S46) and the process of outputting off-data to the second output port 134 (step S40b) are justified. It may be performed after the determination data storage process (steps S41 to S44). Further, in FIG. 93A, there is also a process (step S40a) of outputting off-data to output ports (third output port 135, fourth output port 136, and fifth output port 137) other than the second output port 134. , May be performed after the validity determination data storage process (steps S41 to S44).
Of course, this modification can also be applied when the processing of steps S36 to S45 of the main processing in the above embodiment is performed by the timer interrupt processing as in the modification 1.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is a game provided with a winning opening (special variable winning device 38, 39 or ordinary variable winning device 37) that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c and movable member 37b). In the machine, the opening / closing member solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, 39b and solenoid solenoid 37c), an opening / closing control means (game control device 100) that controls a solenoid for an opening / closing member, a counting means (game control device 100) that counts the number of game balls that have won a prize in the winning opening, and a power failure. A power failure determining means (game control device 100) for determining whether or not a power failure has occurred, and the counting means are provided with a game when it is determined by the power failure determining means that a power failure has occurred (step S38; Y). The counting of the number of balls is not executed (step S39), and the opening / closing control means performs opening control (output of on-data to the second output port 134) for converting the opening / closing member to the open state, and returns to the closed state. Blockage control (output of off-data to the second output port 134) for the purpose is possible, and when it is determined by the power failure determination means that a power failure has occurred (step S38; Y), the blockage control is performed. Is executed after a lapse of a predetermined time (step S40b).

Therefore, in the event of a power failure, the block control is executed to return the opening / closing member to the block state after a lapse of a predetermined time, so that the period during the block operation can be extended, and the interest associated with the power failure can be reduced. It can be suppressed.
In addition, by executing the blockage control for returning the opening / closing member to the blockage state after a lapse of a predetermined time, it is possible to shift to a natural blockage operation even when a power failure occurs, which is detrimental to the player's interest (cutting off). ) Never.

Specifically, in the game machine 10 of this modified example, while the opening / closing members (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c and movable member 37b) are being converted to an open state (a state in which the grand prize opening and the power supply are open). When it is determined by the power failure determination means (game control device 100) that a power failure has occurred (step S38; Y), after a predetermined time has elapsed, after the opening / closing member reaches the open state (step S46). Later).

That is, the open / close control means (game control device 100) determines that a power failure has occurred by the power failure determination means (game control device 100) during the opening operation of the open / close members (open / close doors 38c, 39c and movable member 37b). In this case (step S38; Y), the closing control is executed after the opening / closing member reaches the open state (after step S46, that is, after the delay time until the fully open state elapses) (step). It is configured as S40b).
Therefore, when a power failure occurs, after the opening / closing member is completely opened, the closing control for returning the opening / closing member to the closed state is executed, so that the period during the closing operation can be prolonged. It is possible to effectively suppress the decline in interest due to the occurrence of a power outage.

<Modification 5>
For example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), the sixth output port for outputting the operation data of the lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member 38i in the first special variation winning device 38 instead of the second output port 134. The 134a and the seventh output port 134b for outputting the operation data of the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b and the general electric solenoid 37c are provided. Further, instead of the first driver 138a, the sixth driver (drive circuit) 138a1 that receives the operation data signal of the lever solenoid 38f output from the sixth output port 134a and generates and outputs the solenoid drive signal, and the seventh output. A seventh driver (drive circuit) 138a2, which receives the operation data signals of the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b output from the port 134b and the solenoid drive signal 37c and outputs the solenoid drive signal, is provided. The sixth driver 138a1 and the seventh driver 138a2 can also be configured to supply DC32V as the power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 so that the solenoid operating at 32V can be driven.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 replaces the process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step S40), and outputs other than the seventh output port 134b. Processing to output off-data to ports (3rd output port 135, 4th output port 136, 5th output port 137, and 6th output port 134a) (step S40c) A process of waiting for a delay time until the doors 38c, 39c and the movable member 37b) are fully opened (step S46), and a process of outputting off-data to the seventh output port 134b after the delay time has elapsed. It is also possible to configure (step S40d) to be performed.

With this configuration, as in the case of the modified example 4, for example, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), a predetermined time (specifically) after the power failure occurs, not when a power failure occurs (t142). When (t143) elapses (the same time as the time from the start of the opening operation to the fully opened state), the opening / closing members (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c and movable members 37b) of the large winning opening and the general electric power are ) Is started, so that the period during the closing operation (the period that seems to be advantageous to the player) can be prolonged, and the player does not feel lost. Further, regardless of the timing of the occurrence of the power failure, the opening / closing member can move to the closing operation after being in the completely opened state, so that the player's interest is not impaired.

Further, with this configuration, if a power failure occurs while the opening / closing door 38c is being opened, the lever solenoid 38f is immediately turned off (the lever member 38i covers the probabilistic operating region 38h and the game ball flows in. It will not hurt the player's interest because it will be in a state where it cannot be done.
Specifically, the presence or absence of inflow (passage) of the game ball into the probability variation operation region 38h is determined by the special figure game process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process. As described above, since the timer interrupt processing is prohibited when a power failure occurs, even if the game ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h during the power failure, the inflow is not reflected (that is, during the power failure). The inflow of the game ball into the probabilistic operation region 38h cannot trigger the occurrence of a high probability state). Therefore, the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (a state in which the lever member 38i is retracted from the probability change operation area 38h and the game ball can flow in) during the power failure, and the game ball is moved to the probability change operation area 38h during the power failure. Even if the inflow occurs, a high-probability state triggered by the inflow does not occur after the power failure is restored, which may be disappointing and hurt the interest of the player.

On the other hand, as in this modification, the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the general electric solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f are configured to be separately controllable, and when a power failure occurs, the large winning opening solenoid 38b, By configuring the lever solenoid 38g to be turned off immediately while the 39b and the normal electric solenoid 37c are turned off after the lapse of the delay time, the period during the closing operation is prolonged (the period that seems to be advantageous to the player is prolonged). That) and preventing the inflow of the game ball into the probabilistic operating area 38h during a power outage (preventing disappointment) are possible, which reduces the interest of the player. This can be effectively prevented.

In this modified example, not only when a power failure occurs while the opening / closing members (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c and movable member 37b) are in the opening operation (as shown in FIG. 93B), but also. Even if a power failure occurs when the opening / closing member is in the open state (fully open state), off-data is output to the seventh output port 134b after the delay time until the fully open state elapses. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs when the opening / closing member is in the open state (fully open state), the period during the closing operation can be extended, and the opening / closing member shifts to the closing operation after being in the completely open state. Can be done.

Further, in FIG. 94 (b), the process of outputting off-data to the seventh output port 134b (step S40d) without performing the process of waiting for the delay time until the fully opened state elapses (step S46). ) Can be configured to be performed after the validity determination data storage process (steps S41 to S44).
Further, in FIG. 94 (b), the process of waiting for the delay time until the fully opened state elapses (step S46) and the process of outputting off-data to the seventh output port 134b (step S40d) are justified. It may be performed after the determination data storage process (steps S41 to S44). Further, in FIG. 94 (b), off-data is output to output ports (third output port 135, fourth output port 136, fifth output port 137, and sixth output port 134a) other than the seventh output port 134b. The process (step S40c) may also be performed after the validity determination data storage process (steps S41 to S44).

Further, in FIG. 94 (b), the process of waiting for the delay time until the fully opened state elapses (step S46) and the process of outputting off-data to the seventh output port 134b (step S40d) are not performed. It is also possible to configure it as such.
Of course, this modification can also be applied when the processing of steps S36 to S45 of the main processing in the above embodiment is performed by the timer interrupt processing as in the modification 1.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is the solenoid for the movable member (lever solenoid 38f) that drives a predetermined movable member (lever member 38i) other than the opening / closing member (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c and the movable member 37b). A movable control means (game control device 100) for controlling a solenoid for a movable member is provided, and the movable control means brings a predetermined movable member into an initial state (the lever member 38i covers the probabilistic operating region 38h and the game ball flows in. When it is possible to execute return control (output of off-data to the sixth output port 134a) to return to the impossible state), and it is determined by the power failure determination means (game control device 100) that a power failure has occurred ( In step S38; Y), the return control is immediately executed (step S40c).
Therefore, when a power failure occurs, the return control for returning the movable member to the initial state is immediately executed, so that it is possible to effectively suppress the deterioration of the interest caused by the power failure.

In the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a lever member 38i that opens and closes the probabilistic operating region 38h and a probabilistic operating region switch 38d that detects a game ball that has flowed into the probabilistic operating region 38h are provided. Based on the fact that the switch 38d detects the game ball, the probability state of the special figure variation display game is configured to be a high probability state after the end of the special game state, but the present invention is not limited to this.
That is, a movable member that opens and closes a specific area and a specific area switch (V switch) that detects a game ball that has flowed into the specific area are provided, and the player is based on the fact that the specific area switch detects the game ball. It suffices if it is configured so that a favorable state is generated.

Further, the movable member is not limited to the member that opens and closes the specific area, and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the solenoid for the movable member is not limited to the solenoid controlled by the game control device 100, and may be a solenoid controlled by the effect control device 300.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as the gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. Further, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 37 Ordinary variable winning device (winning opening)
37b Movable member (opening and closing member)
37c Solenoid (solenoid for opening / closing member)
38 1st special variable winning device (winning opening)
38b Lower prize opening solenoid (solenoid for opening / closing member)
38c Open / close door (open / close member)
38f lever solenoid (solenoid for moving members)
38i lever member (movable member)
39 Second special variable winning device (winning opening)
38b Top prize opening solenoid (solenoid for opening / closing member)
39c Opening / closing door (opening / closing member)
100 Game control device (open / close control means, counting means, timekeeping means, power failure determination means, storage means, validity determination means, data generation means, movable control means)

Claims (1)

In a game machine equipped with a winning opening that opens and closes with an opening / closing member
An opening / closing member solenoid that converts the opening / closing member from a closed state to an open state,
An opening / closing control means for controlling the solenoid for opening / closing member,
A counting means for counting the number of game balls won in the winning opening, and
A power outage determination means for determining whether or not a power outage has occurred,
Equipped with a storage means that can retain the stored contents even when the power is cut off,
When it is determined by the power failure determining means that a power failure has occurred at the timing when the opening / closing control means tries to convert the opening / closing member into the open state,
The opening / closing control means does not output the data in a state where the data for setting the opening / closing member in the open state is set in the storage means, and does not time the opening time of the opening / closing member. While outputting the data that puts the member in the closed state,
Said counting means, game machine characterized in that it does not run the pre-Symbol game balls number counting.

Images